Canon All in One Printer 3478B001AA User Manual

Basic Operation Guide  
Before Using the Machine  
Documents and Print Media  
Copying  
Printing  
Registering Destinations in the Address Book  
Fax  
E-Mail  
Scanning  
Network  
Settings from a PC  
Maintenance  
Troubleshooting  
Machine Settings  
Appendix  
Please read this guide before operating this product.  
After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of Machine Functions  
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, some functions may not be  
available.  
Copying  
You can use various copy functions.  
Faxing  
In addition to the normal faxing, you  
Basic Operation Guide  
Copying (see on p. 3-1)  
e-Manual  
can send faxes from a computer.  
Copy  
Basic Operation Guide  
Fax (see on p. 6-1)  
e-Manual  
Fax  
Printing  
You can use various print functions  
by printing from a computer.  
Basic Operation Guide  
Printing (see on p. 4-1)  
Scanning  
You can store the scanning  
documents to the computer and the file  
server.  
e-Manual  
Print  
Basic Operation Guide  
Scanning (see on p. 8-1)  
e-Manual  
Scan  
ꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E-Mail  
function  
Scanned documents can be sent as e-  
mail file attachments.  
Network  
This machine can be connected to a  
network. Connecting to a network  
enables you to use various functions.  
Basic Operation Guide  
E-Mail (see on p. 7-1)  
e-Manual  
Basic Operation Guide  
Network (see on p. 9-1)  
E-Mail  
e-Manual  
Network Settings  
Security  
function  
You can limit the use of the machine by  
setting the IDs. You can also limit the use of  
some functions.  
Remote User  
Interface  
You can set and manage this machine  
easily and quickly from a computer.  
Basic Operation Guide  
Machine Settings (see on p. 13-1)  
e-Manual  
Security  
Basic Operation Guide  
Setting from a PC (see on p. 10-1)  
e-Manual  
Setting from a PC  
ꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
ꢀv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
vꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Preface  
Thank you for choosing a Canon product. Before using the machine, please read the  
following instructions for your safety.  
Available Features  
The procedures described in this manual are based on the imageCLASS D1180. Depending on the system  
configuration and product purchased, some features described in the manuals may not be functional. The  
table below shows the available features on a product basis.  
: available  
—: not available  
E-Mail,  
SMB/  
Remote  
UI  
Print  
Print  
(PCL)  
COPY  
SCAN  
FAX  
ADF  
(UFRII LT)  
I-Fax  
(Network  
Board)  
(Receive)  
imageCLASS  
D1180  
imageCLASS  
D1170  
imageCLASS  
D1150  
imageCLASS  
D1120  
The Cassette Feeding Module-U1 is an available option.  
ꢀx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Use This Guide  
How to Use This Guide  
Symbols Used in This Manual  
The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and  
instructions that should be observed for safety.  
Indicates a warning that may lead to death or serious injury if not observed.  
Explains how to avoid actions that could injure you or damage your machine.  
Explains operating restrictions and how to avoid minor difficulties.  
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual  
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this  
manual.  
Operation Panel Keys: <Key icon> + [Key name]  
Example:  
[Stop/Reset].  
Buttons on the computer operation screen: [Button name]  
Example: [OK]  
Information in the display appears in angle brackets: <LOAD PAPER>.  
Abbreviations Used in This Manual  
In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:  
Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system : Windows 2000  
Microsoft Windows XP operating system : Windows XP  
Microsoft Windows Vista operating system : Windows Vista  
Microsoft Windows 7 operating system : Windows 7  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system : Windows Server 2003  
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system : Windows Server 2008  
Microsoft Windows operating system : Windows  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How to Use This Guide  
Illustrations Used in This Manual  
Unless otherwise mentioned, illustrations used in this manual are those taken when no optional equipment is  
attached to the imageCLASS D1180.  
If there is any difference between the imageCLASS D1180, D1170, D1150 or D1120, it is clearly indicated in the  
text, for instance “imageCLASS D1180 Only.”  
The display used in this manual is the factory preset display for the imageCLASS D1180 in default setting.  
Depending on the system configuration and product purchased, the appearance of the display may differ.  
xꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Precautions  
Safety Precautions  
Important Safety Instructions  
Except as specifically described in this guide, do not attempt to service the machine yourself. Never attempt to disassemble the  
machine: opening and removing its interior covers will expose you to dangerous voltages and other risks. For all service, contact Canon  
Customer Care Center, or a Canon Authorized Service Facility.  
Handling and Maintenance  
Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it, because it may be hot and result in burn injury.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine.  
Do not subject the machine to strong physical shocks or vibrations.  
Always unplug the machine before moving or cleaning it.  
To avoid paper jams, never unplug the power cord, open the covers or add or remove paper in the machine  
while printing.  
When transporting the machine, make sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine.  
Place the toner cartridge in its original protective bag or wrap it in a thick cloth to prevent exposure to light.  
Always grip the handle on the sides of the machine when you lift the machine. Never lift the machine by  
any of its trays or attachments.  
Do not insert any objects into the slots or openings on the machine since they may touch dangerous  
voltage points or short out parts. This could result in fire or electric shock.  
Do not allow small objects (such as pins, paper clips, or staples) to fall into the machine.  
To avoid spillage in or around the machine, do not eat or drink near it.  
Keep the machine clean. Dust accumulation can prevent the machine from operating properly.  
Use the telephone cable shorter than 118 1/8" (3 m).  
Unplug the machine from the wall outlet and contact Canon Customer Care Center in any of the following  
cases:  
When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.  
If liquid or small object has fallen into the machine.  
If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.  
If the machine does not operate normally when you have followed the instructions in this guide. Adjust  
only those controls that are covered by the instructions in this guide. Improper adjustment of other  
controls may result in damage and may require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the  
product to normal operation.  
If the machine has been dropped.  
If the machine exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for servicing.  
xꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Precautions  
Do not place your hands, hair, clothing, etc., near the exit and feed rollers. Even if the machine is not in  
operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the rollers, which may result in personal injury or  
damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.  
Be careful when removing printed paper from paper delivery tray or when aligning it, because it may be hot  
and result in burn injury.  
Toner and Toner Cartridge Availability  
Toner cartridge for this machine will be available for at least seven (7) years (or any such longer period as  
required by applicable laws) after production of this machine model has been discontinued.  
Location  
Place the machine on a flat, stable, vibration-free surface that is strong enough to support its weight.  
Place the machine in a cool, dry, clean, well ventilated place.  
Make sure the area is free from dust.  
Make sure the location is not exposed to high temperature or humidity.  
Keep the machine away from direct sunlight as this can damage it. If you have to place the machine near a  
window, install heavy curtains or blinds.  
Do not use the machine near water. Make sure that no wet or humid objects come into contact with the  
machine.  
Do not use or store the machine outdoors.  
Do not place the machine near devices that contain magnets or generate magnetic fields, such as speakers.  
If possible, place the machine near an existing telephone line outlet for easy connection of the telephone  
line cord, and to avoid the expense of installing a new outlet.  
Place the machine near a standard 120 V AC (60 Hz) power outlet.  
To ensure reliable operation of the machine and to protect it from overheating (which can cause it to  
operate abnormally and create a fire risk), do not block the exhaust vent. Never block or cover any openings  
on the machine by placing it on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. Do not place the machine in a  
cupboard or built-in installation, or near a radiator or other heat source unless proper ventilation is  
provided. Leave at least 4" (100 mm) around all sides of the machine.  
xꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Precautions  
Do not stack boxes or furniture around the power outlet. Keep the area free so you can reach the outlet  
quickly. If you notice anything unusual (smoke, strange odors, noises) around the machine, unplug the  
power cord immediately. Contact Canon Customer Care Center.  
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord, and do not place the machine where the cord will be  
walked on. Make sure the cord is not knotted or kinked.  
Power Supply  
During electrical storms, unplug the power cord from the power outlet. (Any sent or received documents  
stored in memory are backed up for about 15 minutes.)  
Whenever you unplug the power cord, wait at least five seconds before you plug it in again.  
Do not plug the power cord into an uninterruptible power supply (UPS).  
Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power plug, you will  
be unable to unplug it in an emergency.  
This product emits low level magnetic flux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please move away from this product  
and consult your doctor.  
xꢀv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Precautions  
Telephone Equipment  
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and  
injury to persons, including the following:  
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.  
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a  
problem with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the information in Chapter 13. If you cannot  
solve the problem or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon Customer Care Center at 1-  
800-OK-CANON between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday. On-line support for  
24 hours is also available at the website.  
http://www.canontechsupport.com/  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:  
For e-mail support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions,  
visit http://www.canon.ca/  
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still  
under warranty 1-800-652-2666  
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are  
available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://  
www.canon.ca/  
*Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Legal NNoottiices  
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this product meets  
the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.  
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program  
that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office  
equipment.  
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions  
that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business  
proprietors can participate voluntarily.  
The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,  
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating  
nations.  
Tradeemarrks  
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageCLASS are registered trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and  
may also be trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Windows Vista are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.  
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective  
owners.  
Copyright  
Copyright © 2010 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,  
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language in  
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or otherwise, without  
the prior written permission of Canon Inc.  
UFST: Copyright © 1989-2003 Monotype imaging, Inc.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Third Party Software  
A. This product includes third-party software modules. Use and distribution of this software modules (the  
“SOFTWARE”) are subject to conditions (1) through (9) below.  
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export control laws, restrictions or regulations of  
the countries involved in the event that this product including the SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or  
exported into any country.  
(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the title, ownership and intellectual property  
rights in and to the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no license or right, expressed or  
implied, is hereby conveyed or granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any intellectual  
property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the Canon product you purchased (the “PRODUCT”).  
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without  
prior written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.  
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign all of your  
rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations under the conditions to transferee and (b) such  
transferee agrees to be bound by all these conditions.  
(6) You may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the SOFTWARE  
to human readable form.  
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based  
on the SOFTWARE.  
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.  
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.  
B. In case this product includes software modules and/or related documentations made by Adobe Systems  
Incorporated, use and distribution of software modules and/or related documentations (the “ADOBE  
SOFTWARE”) are subject to conditions below in addition to (1) through (9) above.  
The ADOBE SOFTWARE is a “commercial item,as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting  
of “commercial computer softwareand “commercial computer software documentation,as such terms are  
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through  
227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users shall acquire The ADOBE SOFTWARE with only those  
rights set forth herein.  
C. Notwithstanding A and B above, in case the other conditions accompany third-party software modules,  
these software modules are subject to the other conditions.  
xvꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Disclaimers  
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.  
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO  
MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY  
NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.  
For CA, USA only  
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.  
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.  
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images  
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as  
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in  
criminal and/or civil liability.  
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are  
uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular  
document, and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in  
advance with your legal advisor for guidance.  
– Paper Money  
– Money Orders  
– Travelers Checks  
– Food Stamps  
– Certificates of Deposit  
– Passports  
– Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
– Identifying Badges or Insignias  
– Selective Service or Draft Papers  
– Immigration Papers  
– Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)  
– Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness  
– Stock Certificates  
– Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies  
– Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title  
– Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of  
Copyright Owner  
xvꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)  
imageCLASS D1120 : F157000  
imageCLASS D1180/D1170/D1150 : F157002  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,  
and  
(2) this device must accept an interference received, including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to  
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in this manual. If you  
make such changes or modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.  
Canon U.S.A., Inc.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON  
xꢀx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Users in the U.S.A.  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 14, “Appendix,” for specific  
dimensions and weight.  
B.  
Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.  
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which should be installed by the telephone company. If  
the RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile operation is not possible.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The line  
should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A  
dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit withoutCall Waitingcan be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone  
systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which  
may cause a facsimile error.  
C.  
Power Requirements  
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.  
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line shared with other appliances that cause  
“electrical noise.” Air conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of this sort generate  
electrical noise that often interferes with communications equipment and the sending and receiving of  
documents.  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Connection of the Equipment  
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the  
rear panel of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the  
format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.  
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to  
a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an  
incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the  
number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local  
telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:  
AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).  
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is  
designed to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring using a compatible modular jack that  
is Part 68 compliant.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party  
lines is subjected to state tariffs.  
In Case of Equipment Malfunction  
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected by the procedures described in this guide or the e-  
Manual, disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and disconnect the power cord.  
The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the main power switch turned ON until the problem is  
completely resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service Facilities for servicing of equipment,  
Information regarding Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling Canon Customer Care  
Center (1-800-OK-CANON).  
xxꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legal Notices  
Rights of the Telephone Company  
If this equipment (imageCLASS D1180/D1170/D1150/D1120) causes harm to the telephone network, the  
telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also retains the right to  
make changes in facilities and services that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such changes  
are necessary, the telephone company is required to give adequate prior notice to the user.  
However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as  
possible. Also, the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint with the FCC if he/she believes  
it is necessary.  
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device,  
including FAX machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each  
transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity,  
or other individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual.  
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance  
transmission charges.)  
In order to program this information into your machine, you should complete the procedure for registering your name, unit’s telephone  
number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.  
Users in Canada  
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment  
A. Location  
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine. See Chapter 14, “Appendix,” for specific  
dimensions and weight.  
B.  
Order Information  
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be used.  
2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack  
is not present, installation cannot occur.  
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone company’s business representative. The line  
should be a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one line per unit.  
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line  
-or-  
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you communicate overseas  
Canon recommends an individual line following industry standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial) telephones. A  
dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) unit withoutCall Waitingcan be used with your facsimile unit. Key telephone  
systems are not recommended because they send nonstandard signals to individual telephones for ringing and special codes, which  
may cause a facsimile error.  
xxꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
C.  
Power Requirements  
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be  
independent from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric equipment that is thermostatically  
controlled. The rated value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack should be relatively  
close to the power outlet to facilitate installation.  
Notice  
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.  
The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be  
connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of  
devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.  
The REN of this product is 1.0.  
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities  
of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable  
method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a single line individual  
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The  
customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent deterioration of  
service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated  
by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions,  
may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility,  
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution  
may be particularly important in rural areas.  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or  
electrician, as appropriate.  
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B limits.  
xxꢀꢀꢀ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Legal Notices  
Utilisation au Canada  
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un Télécopieur Canon  
A. Emplacement  
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre  
15, Annexe (Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).  
B.  
Installation téléphonique  
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions) doit être utilisée.  
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera installé par la compagnie téléphonique. Sans  
ce jack, la mise en place serait impossible.  
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez une ligne d’affaires normale de qualité  
téléphonique courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une ligne par appareil.  
Ligne automatique interurbaine  
ou  
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez avec les pays étrangers)  
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme aux normes industrielles, à savoir:  
ligne téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500 (pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible de raccorder ce  
télécopieur à un système téléphonique à poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux d’appel non normalisés ou des  
codes spéciaux qui risquent de perturber le fonctionnement du télécopieur.  
C.  
Condition d’alimentation  
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre à trois branches, du type simple ou double, et  
qui ne sert pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un climatiseur ou tout autre appareil  
électrique à thermostat.  
L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être  
assez proche de la prise de courant.  
xxꢀv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Legal Notices  
Remarques  
Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.  
Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le connecter à l’équipement de la  
compagnie de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil en utilisant une méthode de  
connexion autorisée. Il se peut qu’il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne individuelle d’abonné,  
qui a été installée par la compagnie, au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologués (rallonge  
téléphonique).  
L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne  
constitue pas une garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans certaines circonstances.  
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être  
raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une combinaison  
quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous  
les dispositifs n’excède pas 5.  
Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est 1,0.  
Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être faites par une société d’entretien canadienne autorisée  
par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que  
pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de  
télécommunication le droit de débrancher I’appareil.  
Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que les prises de terre de I’appareil d’alimentation, les  
lignes téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette  
précaution est particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales.  
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d’inspection faisant autorité  
en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien, selon le cas.  
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.  
xxv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Safety  
Laasser SSaaffeettyy  
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S.  
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the  
Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce hazardous  
radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined within protective housings and external  
covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation.  
CDRH Regulations  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration  
implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products  
manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.  
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation  
exposure.  
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the machine and is not in a user access area.  
This machine is confirmed as the class 1 laser product in IEC60825-1:2007.  
xxvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before Using the  
Machine  
1
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as the names of the parts and their  
functions, and basic settings to use various functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Machine Components  
Machine Components  
This section describes the parts names of the machine and their functions.  
External View (Front)  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Machine Components  
ADF (Automatic Document Feeder)  
Holds documents and feeds them automatically  
into the scanning area.  
Output tray  
Receives copies, prints and faxes. Outputs paper  
with the printed side facing down.  
Scanning platform  
Slide guides  
Adjust to the width of the document.  
Open this platform to clear paper jams.  
Document feeder tray  
Open button  
Holds documents.  
Push to open the front cover.  
Document delivery tray  
Receives documents.  
Front cover  
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge or  
to clear paper jams.  
Operation panel  
Controls the machine.  
Main power switch  
Turns the power ON or OFF.  
Multi-purpose tray  
Feeds non-standard size or thick/thin type paper  
Paper cassette  
stacks.  
Holds up to 500 sheets of paper (21 lb (80 g/m2)).  
Cassette Feeding Module-U1 (Optional)  
Holds the additional paper supply. Up to 500  
sheets of paper (21 lb (80 g/m2)) can be held.  
Multi-purpose tray extension  
Pull out to load paper stack.  
Slide guides for multi-purpose tray  
Adjusts to the width of the paper.  
Paper stopper  
Lift the paper stopper to prevent the paper from  
falling off the output tray.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Machine Components  
External View (Back)  
USB port  
Connect the USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable.  
Ethernet port  
Connect the network cable.  
External device jack (For the D1180/D1170/  
D1150)  
Connect an external device.  
Telephone line jack (For the D1180/D1170/  
D1150)  
Connect the external telephone cable.  
Power socket  
Connect the power cord.  
Duplex unit cover  
Open this cover to clear paper jams.  
Sub-output tray  
Outputs paper with the printed side facing up.  
Rear cover  
Open this cover to clear paper jams.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Machine Components  
Internal View  
Scanning area  
Scans documents from the ADF.  
Platen glass  
Place documents.  
Toner cartridge  
When toner runs out, pull out the empty toner  
cartridge, and replace it with a new one.  
Duplex unit  
Enables you to use the 2-Sided mode for copying,  
faxing, sending, or scanning.  
Paper size switch lever  
Switch the lever according to the paper size for 2-  
sided copying or 2-sided printing.  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Panel  
Operation Panel  
This section describes the names and functions of the operation panel keys, and describes  
all the parts on the operation panel.  
Main Operation Panel  
D1180/D1170  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Operation Panel  
D1150  
D1120  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation Panel  
Paper Select indicator  
[Energy Saver] key  
Indicates the selected paper source.  
Press to set or cancel the Sleep mode manually.  
The key lights green when the Sleep mode is set,  
and goes off when the mode is canceled.  
[Stop/Reset] key  
Press to stop a current job. Also press to return  
the machine to the standby mode.  
[Start] key  
[Collate/2 on 1] key  
Press to collate copies, or press to set 2 on 1  
copying. Also press to set ID card copying.  
[Paper Select] key  
Press to select a paper source (paper cassette or  
multi-purpose tray).  
Press to start copying, scanning and sending  
[Enlarge/Reduce] key  
documents.  
Press to enlarge or reduce copy ratio.  
Error indicator  
[Menu] key  
Blinks when an error has occurred.  
Press to select or cancel the modes in setting  
menus.  
Processing/Data indicator  
Blinks when the machine is working. Lights when  
the machine has waiting jobs and stores the data  
in memory.  
Display  
Displays messages and prompts during  
operation. Displays selection, text, and numbers  
when adjusting the settings.  
[COPY] key  
Press to switch to the Copy mode.  
[SEND/FAX] key (For the D1180/D1170)  
Press to switch to the Send/Fax mode.  
[FAX] key (For the D1150)  
[Tone] key  
Press to switch from rotary pulse to tone dialing  
(for the D1180/D1170/D1150). Also press to  
switch the input mode.  
[Density] key  
Press to adjust the density for copy or documents  
you send.  
Press to switch to the Fax mode.  
[Image Quality] key  
[SCAN] key  
Press to select image quality for copy or fax.  
Press to switch to the Scan mode.  
[Paper Settings] key  
key  
Press to increase the value for various settings.  
Also press to see the next item in the menu. For  
the D1180/D1170/D1150, you can use this key to  
temporarily adjust the monitor tone volume.  
Press to specify the paper size and type for the  
paper cassette or multi-purpose tray.  
Numeric keys  
Enter alphanumeric characters and symbols.  
[OK] key  
[Log In/Out] key (ID key)  
Press to accept a set function or mode.  
Also press and hold to print a sample page when  
you are in the copy mode. For details, see  
Press when setting or enabling Department ID/  
User ID management.  
[Clear] key  
Press to clear entered alphanumeric characters.  
[Report] key  
Press to print reports and lists manually.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Panel  
key  
Press to decrease the value for various settings.  
Also press to see the previous item in the menu.  
For the D1180/D1170/D1150, you can use this  
key to temporarily adjust the monitor tone  
volume.  
[Job Cancel/Status Monitor] key  
Press to cancel the job stored in memory.  
Also press to check the status of jobs such as  
copy, fax, print, etc.  
[View Settings] key  
Press to confirm the settings of the copy, fax, and  
send function.  
[2-Sided] key  
Press to copy or send 2-sided documents.  
2-Sided mode indicator  
Indicates the selected 2-Sided mode for copying.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Panel  
Send Operation Panel  
D1180/D1170  
D1150  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation Panel  
[Address Book] key  
Press to search pre-registered recipients under  
one-touch keys and coded dial codes by name,  
number, or address.  
[Recall/Pause] key (For the D1180/D1170)  
Press to recall previously set send jobs, including  
the destinations, scan settings, and send settings.  
Press to enter a pause between or after the  
telephone/fax number when dialing or  
registering numbers.  
[Redial/Pause] key (For the D1150)  
Press to recall the last three destinations. Press to  
enter a pause between or after the telephone/fax  
number when dialing or registering numbers.  
[Coded Dial] key  
Press to specify recipients registered under coded  
dial codes.  
[Hook] key  
Press when you want to dial without lifting up  
the handset of the external telephone.  
One-Touch keys  
Press to specify recipients registered under one-  
touch keys.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display (Standby Mode)  
Display (Standby Mode)  
This section describes the display of the operation panel of the standby mode.  
– Depending on your needs, you can change the standby display which appears when the main power switch is turned ON. For details,  
seeSetting the Initial Function,in the e-Manual.  
– When the main power switch is turned ON, the message <INITIALIZING.../PLEASE WAIT> is shown until the standby display appears.  
– If the Auto Clear function is activated, the display returns to the standby mode.  
D1150  
Copy Mode  
Wꢀthout optꢀonal paper cassette  
12/31/2008 WED 15:50  
FaxOnly  
FINE  
100%  
LTR  
TEXT/PHOTO  
01  
Date & Time  
Image quality  
Receive mode  
Wꢀth optꢀonal paper cassette  
Scan Mode  
SCANNING MODE  
100%  
AUTO  
TEXT/PHOTO  
01  
Zoom ratio  
Paper size  
Quantity  
Image quality  
Density  
Send Mode/Fax Mode  
D1180/D1170  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display (Standby Mode)  
Log In Mode  
If the Department ID Management or User ID  
Management is set, the Log In screen is displayed.  
For information on the Department ID Management  
or User ID Management, see “Security,in the e-  
Manual.  
For Department ID Management  
ENTER DEPT.ID  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
Department ID and password, then press [OK] or  
[Log In/Out].  
For User ID Management  
ENTER USER ID  
:a  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the User ID and  
password, then press [OK] or [Log In/Out].  
– Make sure to press  
[Log In/Out] after using the machine  
when the Department ID/User ID Management is set.  
– When the main power switch is turned ON, the message  
<INITIALIZING.../PLEASE WAIT> is shown until the standby  
display appears.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Toner Cartridge  
Toner Cartridge  
The average print yield of the Canon genuine starter toner cartridge which comes with the  
machine is 2,300 pages, the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge is 5,000 pages. The  
page counts are on the basis of “ISO/ IEC 19752”* when printing A4 size paper with the  
default print density setting. The level of toner consumption varies depending on the type  
of documents printed. If your average document contains a lot of graphics, tables, or charts,  
the average print yield of the toner cartridge will be fewer as they consume more toner.  
When you are replacing a toner cartridge, be sure to use a toner cartridge designed for this  
product. To purchase the Canon genuine replacement toner cartridge, contact your local  
Canon dealer or Canon Customer Care Center (U.S.A.:1-800-OK-CANON, Canada:1-800-652-  
2666).  
* “ISO/IEC 19752” is the global standard related to “Method for the determination of toner  
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices  
that may contain printer components” issued by ISO (International Organization for  
Standardization).  
Supported Canon  
Model Name  
Type  
Average Print Yield  
Genuine Toner Cartridge  
Canon Cartridge 120 Starter  
Canon Cartridge 120  
D1180/D1170/D1150/  
D1120  
Bundled  
Replacement  
2,300 pages  
5,000 pages  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Toner Cartridge  
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge  
– Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk  
drives, and floppy disks. The magnet inside the toner cartridge  
may harm these items.  
– Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or  
rapid changes in temperature.  
Note the following when handling the toner  
cartridge.  
– Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright  
light for more than five minutes.  
– Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open  
the bag until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the  
machine.  
– Save the toner cartridge’s protective bag in case you need to  
repack and transport the toner cartridge at a later date.  
– Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or  
where there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.  
– Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine  
unnecessarily.  
– Do not open the drum protective shutter on the toner  
cartridge. Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is  
exposed to light or is damaged.  
– Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid  
touching the drum protective shutter.  
– Do not place the toner cartridge in an upright or an upside  
down position. If toner becomes caked in the toner cartridge,  
it may become impossible to free it even by shaking the toner  
cartridge.  
– Do not place the toner cartridge in fire. Toner powder is  
flammable.  
– If there is a toner powder leakage, make sure not to inhale or  
touch the toner powder. If it comes in contact with your skin,  
rinse with cold water using soap. If you feel an irritation on  
your skin or inhale the powder, consult a doctor immediately.  
– When removing the toner cartridge from the machine, make  
sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care, the toner  
powder may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and  
mouth. If this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor  
immediately.  
– Keep the toner cartridge away from small children. If they  
ingest the toner powder, consult a doctor immediately.  
– Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. The toner powder  
may scatter and come in contact with your eyes and mouth. If  
this happens, rinse with water and consult a doctor  
immediately.  
– For optimum print quality, when you replace toner cartridges,  
using Canon genuine ones is recommended.  
– Be Careful of Counterfeit Toner Cartridges  
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner  
cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner  
cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine  
performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction,  
accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner  
cartridge.  
For more information, see  
http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Entering Characters  
Entering Characters  
For displays that require alphanumeric entries, follow the procedure below to enter  
characters.  
Example: Enter <Canon>. For details on entering characters, see “Register User Telephone  
Number and Unit Name,in the Starter Guide.  
Press repeatedly until an uppercase  
<C> appears.  
1
2
NAME  
C
:a  
Press  
to move the cursor to the right,  
then press until an <a> appears.  
NAME  
Ca  
:a  
Press until an <n> appears.  
3
4
NAME  
Can  
:a  
Press  
to move the cursor to the right,  
then press until an <o> appears.  
NAME  
Cano  
:a  
Press  
to move the cursor to the right,  
5
then press until an <n> appears.  
NAME  
:a  
Canon  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Telephone Line Settings (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Telephone Line Settings (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. If this setting is incorrect,  
you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Make sure to check the type of  
telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting. The default setting is  
<TOUCH TONE>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select the telephone  
1
2
6
7
line type, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TEL LINE TYPE  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TOUCH TONE  
– <TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing  
– <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing  
– If you do not know the telephone line type,  
call your telephone service provider for  
details.  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <USER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
2.USER SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL LINE  
TYPE>, then press [OK].  
USER SETTINGS  
2.TEL LINE TYPE  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Timer Settings  
Timer Settings  
The timer settings enables you to set the Sleep Mode, Auto Clear Time, and the Daylight  
Saving Time.  
Setting the Sleep Mode  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
5
6
interval, then press [OK].  
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of  
time, it automatically enters the Sleep mode. The  
default settings are <ON> and <5MIN>.  
TIMER  
5MIN.  
Press [Menu].  
– You can set the interval from 3 to 30 minutes  
(in one-minute increments).  
– You can also enter values using  
[numeric keys].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <TIMER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
3
4
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
MENU  
7.TIMER SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <AUTO SLEEP  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
[Energy Saver] lights green when the  
machine enters the Sleep mode.  
– To resume the normal mode from the Sleep  
mode, press [Energy Saver] on the operation  
panel.  
– To enter the Sleep mode manually, press  
[Energy Saver] on the operation panel.  
– The machine will not enter the Sleep mode  
when:  
TIMER SETTINGS  
4.AUTO SLEEP TIME  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
the machine is in operation  
the Processing/Data indicator lights or blinks  
a message appears on the display and the  
Error indicator blinks  
paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray  
a paper jam occurs in the machine  
the handset of the external telephone is off  
the hook  
AUTO SLEEP TIME  
ON  
– The machine will leave the Sleep mode when:  
you press [Energy Saver] on the operation  
panel  
a fax is received*  
the handset of the external telephone is off  
the hook*  
a print job is sent from a computer, and the  
print is started  
*For the D1180/D1170/D1150  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Timer Settings  
Setting the Auto Clear Time  
Setting the Daylight Saving Time  
If the machine remains idle for a certain period of  
time, the display returns to the standby mode (Auto  
Clear function). This section describes how to set  
the period of time until the display returns to the  
standby mode. The default settings is <2MIN>.  
In some countries or areas, time is advanced  
throughout the summer season. This is called  
“Daylight Saving Time.This section describes how  
to set the Daylight Saving Time. The default setting  
is <OFF>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press [Menu].  
1
1
Press  
or  
to select <TIMER  
Press  
or  
to select <TIMER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
3
4
5
6
MENU  
MENU  
7.TIMER SETTINGS  
7.TIMER SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <AUTO CLEAR  
Press  
or  
to select <DAYLIGHT  
SV.TIME>, then press [OK].  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
TIMER SETTINGS  
5.AUTO CLEAR TIME  
TIMER SETTINGS  
6.DAYLIGHT SV.TIME  
Press  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
press [OK].  
AUTO CLEAR TIME  
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME  
ON  
ON  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
Press  
or  
to select <START DATE/  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
interval, then press [OK].  
AUTO CLEAR TIME  
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME  
1.START DATE/TIME  
2MIN.  
You can set the interval from 1 to 9 minutes (in  
one minute increments).  
You can also enter values using  
keys].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <MONTH>,  
[numeric  
START DATE/TIME  
1.MONTH  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
6
1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Timer Settings  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the month, then  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <MONTH>,  
7
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
MONTH  
END DATE/TIME  
1.MONTH  
MARCH  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <WEEK>, then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the month, then  
8
START DATE/TIME  
2.WEEK  
MONTH  
NOVEMBER  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the week, then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <WEEK>, then  
9
WEEK  
END DATE/TIME  
2.WEEK  
SECOND WEEK  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <DAY>, then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the week, then  
10  
11  
12  
START DATE/TIME  
3.DAY  
WEEK  
FIRST WEEK  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the day, then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <DAY>, then  
DAY  
END DATE/TIME  
3.DAY  
SUNDAY  
Press  
or  
to select <END DATE/  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select the day, then  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
DAYLIGHT SV.TIME  
1.END DATE/TIME  
DAY  
SUNDAY  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
1-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Documents  
and Print  
Media  
2
This chapter describes the types of paper and documents that can be used with the machine and how to load paper  
in the paper cassette and the multi-purpose tray.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Documents Requirements  
Documents Requirements  
Platen Glass  
ADF  
Type  
Plain paper  
Plain paper (Multi-page documents of the  
same size, thickness and weight or one-page  
documents.)  
Thick documents  
Photographs  
Small documents (e.g., index cards)  
Special types of paper (e.g., tracing  
paper*1, transparencies*1, etc.)  
Book (Height: Maximum 7/8"  
(20 mm))  
Size (W × L)  
Weight  
Maximum 8 1/2" × 14"  
Maximum 8 1/2" × 14" (Maximum 215.9 ×  
355.6 mm)  
(Maximum 216 × 356 mm)  
Minimum 5 1/2" × 5" (Minimum 139.7 ×  
128 mm)  
Maximum 4.4 lb (2 kg)  
One-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 28 lb (50 to  
105 g/m2)  
Two-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb (64 to  
105 g/m2)  
Quantity  
1 sheet  
Maximum 50 sheets*2  
(Maximum 30 sheets for LGL documents)*2  
1
2
*
When copying transparent documents such as tracing paper or transparencies, use a piece of plain white paper to cover the  
document after placing it face-down on the platen glass.  
21 lb (80 g/m2) paper  
*
Do not place the document on the platen glass or in the ADF until the glue, ink or correction fluid on the  
document is completely dry.  
Remove all fasteners (staples, paper clips, etc.) before loading the documents in the ADF.  
To prevent document jams in the ADF, do not use any of the following:  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Coated paper  
Torn paper  
Onion skin or thin paper  
Documents with staples or paper clips attached  
Paper printed with a thermal transfer printer  
Transparencies  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scanning Area  
Scanning Area  
Make sure your document's text and graphics fall within the shaded area in the following  
diagram. Note that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight  
variations in actual use.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Placing Documents  
Placing Documents  
This section describes how to place your documents on the platen glass and in the ADF.  
Align the document with the appropriate  
paper size marks.  
On the Platen Glass  
3
Open the ADF.  
1
If your document does not match any of the  
paper size marks, align the center of your  
document with the arrow mark.  
Place a document face down.  
2
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Placing Documents  
Close the ADF.  
Adjust the slide guides to the width of the  
documents.  
4
2
3
The document is ready for scanning.  
Neatly place the documents face up in  
the document feeder tray.  
– When closing the ADF, be careful not to get  
your fingers caught, as this may result in  
personal injury.  
– Do not press down the ADF forcefully, as this  
may damage the platen glass and cause  
personal injury.  
Remove the document from the platen glass  
when scanning is complete.  
The document is ready for scanning.  
In the ADF  
– Do not add or remove documents while they  
are being scanned.  
– When scanning is complete, remove the  
documents from the document delivery tray to  
avoid paper jams.  
– Avoid using ADF to scan the same document  
more than 30 times. When scanned repeatedly,  
documents can become folded or torn, which  
may cause paper jams.  
Fan the document stack and even the  
edges.  
1
– If the feeder rollers are soiled from scanning a  
document written in pencil, clean them. (See  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Paper Requirements  
Paper Requirements  
Paper cassette  
Multi-purpose tray  
Size (W × L)  
LTR, LGL, A4, B5, A5, Executive,  
Oficio, Brazil-Oficio, Mexico-Oficio,  
FLSP, A-FLS, Government-LTR,  
Government-LGL  
3" × 5" to Legal (8 1/2" × 14")  
(76 × 127 to 216 × 356 mm)  
Weight  
Quantity  
Type  
16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m2)  
16 to 51 lb (60 to 190 g/m2)  
500 sheets maximum *1  
50 sheets maximum *1  
Plain Paper *2  
Plain Paper L *2  
Color *3  
Recycled *4  
*5  
*6  
Heavy Paper 1  
Heavy Paper 2 *7  
Transparency *8  
Labels  
Envelope  
(: available : not available)  
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
21 lb (80 g/m2) paper  
From 16 to 21 lb (60 to 80 g/m2)  
17 lb (64 g/m2)  
From 17 to 21 lb (64 to 80 g/m2)  
From 24 to 32 lb (90 to 120 g/m2)  
From 24 to 40 lb (90 to 150 g/m2)  
From 40 to 43 lb (151 to 163 g/m2)  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Use only LTR or A4 transparencies made especially for this machine.  
The default paper size is LTR. If you use a different paper size, you need to change the paper size settings. (SeeSetting Paper Size and  
Type,on p. 2-17.)  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Paper Requirements  
To prevent paper jams, do not use any of the following:  
Wrinkled or creased paper  
Curled or rolled paper  
Coated paper  
Torn paper  
Damp paper  
Very thin paper  
Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)  
The following types of paper do not print well:  
Highly textured paper  
Very smooth paper  
Shiny paper  
Make sure the paper is free from dust, lint, and oil stains.  
Make sure to test paper before purchasing large quantities.  
Store all paper wrapped and on a flat surface until ready for use. Keep opened packs in their original  
packaging in a cool, dry location.  
Store paper at 64.4°F–75.2°F (18°C–24°C), 40%–60% relative humidity.  
Use only the transparencies designed for laser printers. Canon recommends you to use Canon type  
transparencies with this machine.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printable Area  
Printable Area  
The shaded area indicates the approximate printable area of LTR paper and envelope. Note  
that the margin widths listed are approximate and there may be slight variations in actual  
use.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Loading Paper  
Loading Paper  
This section describes how to load paper in the paper cassette and multi-purpose tray.  
Hold the lock release lever of the side  
In the Paper Cassette  
3
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to  
the mark for the size of the paper to be  
loaded. The side paper guides move  
together.  
This section describes how to load paper in the  
paper cassette.  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
1
Hold the paper cassette with both hands  
and remove it from the machine.  
2
– Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the  
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the  
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause  
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.  
– A6 size paper cannot be loaded.  
Make sure to take the paper cassette out of the  
machine before loading paper. If paper is loaded  
while the paper cassette is partially pulled out, the  
paper cassette may fall, resulting in damage to the  
machine or personal injury.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Paper  
Hold the lock release lever of the rear  
Load the paper stack of the appropriate  
size with the print side facing up. Align  
the rear edge of the paper stack with the  
rear paper guide.  
4
paper guides (A) and slide the guides to  
the mark for the size of the paper to be  
loaded.  
6
– When loading paper, be careful not to cut your  
fingers on the edges of the paper.  
– Make sure the paper stack does not exceed the  
load limit mark (A) and (B).  
– Make sure to set the guides to the mark for the  
size of the paper to be loaded correctly. If the  
guides are positioned incorrectly, it may cause  
paper jams, dirty prints, etc.  
– A6 size paper cannot be loaded.  
Fan the paper stack and even the edges.  
5
– The paper cassette holds approximately 500  
sheets of paper (21 lb (80 g/m2)).  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands  
and set it back into the machine.  
In the Multi-Purpose Tray  
7
8
If you are making prints on transparencies, labels,  
non-standard size paper, or envelopes, load them  
into the multi-purpose tray.  
– Note the following points when using the multi-purpose tray:  
Paper Quantity: one to approximately 50 sheets (21 lb  
(80 g/m2))  
Paper Size: 3" × 5to 8 1/2× 14(76.2 × 127 mm to 216 ×  
356 mm )  
Paper Weight: 16 to 51 lb (60 to 190 g/m2)  
Paper which has been rolled or curled must be  
straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed  
smoothly through the multi-purpose tray (allowable curl  
amount: less than 3/8(10 mm) for normal paper, less than  
1/4(5 mm) for heavyweight paper).  
Push the paper cassette as far as it will go.  
Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be  
possible to feed some paper into the multi-purpose tray.  
– Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.  
– If you load multiple sheets of heavyweight paper into the  
multi-purpose tray, a paper jam may occur depending on the  
type of heavyweight paper. If this happens, load only one  
sheet of heavyweight paper at a time.  
– When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight  
paper or transparencies, make sure to correctly set the paper  
type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type  
of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the  
quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become  
dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.  
– If you are printing on the back side of printed paper, the  
edges of the printed paper may become dirty.  
– If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 5  
envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the  
output tray once 5 envelopes have accumulated.  
– Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.  
– For high quality printouts, use paper recommended by  
Canon.  
– Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
– For details on loading paper in the multi-  
purpose tray, seeIn the Multi-Purpose Tray,on  
2-11.  
– In the same manner, load the paper into the  
optional paper cassette. For attaching the  
optional paper cassette, see the instruction  
sheet that comes with the optional paper  
cassette.  
– For details on paper types that can be used with this machine,  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading Paper  
Open the multi-purpose tray.  
Adjust the slide guides to match the size  
of the paper.  
1
3
Pull out the auxiliary tray.  
If you are feeding large size paper, extend the  
tray extension.  
2
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
To print on the back side of preprinted  
paper:  
Load the paper into the multi-purpose  
tray.  
4
Load the preprinted paper face up into the  
multi-purpose tray, as shown in the  
illustration below.  
Insert the paper stack as far as it will go.  
Before inserting paper:  
The display for specifying the paper size and  
type appears if <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to  
<OFF>. For details, see“Setting Paper Size and  
Type,on p. 2-17.  
When you use the multi-purpose tray to  
make copies, straighten out curled paper  
prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper  
may cause a paper jam.  
If there is difficulty in straightening out  
curled paper, curl the front edges of the  
paper upward, as shown below.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
If you are loading envelopes into the multi-  
purpose tray:  
– When loading paper into the multi-purpose  
Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown,  
and then stack them together.  
Repeat this step five times for each set of  
five envelopes.  
tray, align the paper stack neatly between the  
slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly,  
a paper jam may occur.  
– If you are printing on heavyweight paper or  
envelopes using the multi-purpose tray, and  
find that the paper or envelopes are not being  
fed smoothly or evenly through the multi-  
purpose tray, remove the paper or envelopes,  
curl the feeding edges upward approximately  
1/8(3 mm), and then reload the paper or  
envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables  
the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as  
they are fed into the machine from the multi-  
purpose tray.  
Place the envelopes on a clean, level  
surface, and press all the way around the  
envelopes by hand, in the direction of the  
arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this  
step five times for each set of five  
envelopes.  
– If there are instructions on the paper package  
about which side of the paper to load, follow  
those instructions.  
– When the paper is loaded into the multi-  
purpose tray, the side facing down is the one  
printed on.  
– If problems, such as poor print quality or paper  
jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and  
reload it.  
Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in  
the direction that they will be fed.  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
Hold down the four corners of the  
envelopes firmly, so that they and the  
sealed or glued portion stay flat.  
The display for specifying the paper size and  
type appears if <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to  
<OFF>. For details, see“Setting Paper Size and  
Type,on p. 2-17.  
– Do not print on the back side of the envelopes  
(the side with the flap).  
– If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten  
them by hand before loading them into the  
multi-purpose tray.  
– The multi-purpose tray can hold 5 envelopes at  
a time.  
– Envelopes may be creased in the printing  
process.  
Load the envelopes, as shown below.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loading Paper  
Close the duplex unit cover.  
Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever  
3
When performing 2-sided copying or 2-sided  
printing, make sure to confirm that the paper size  
switch lever is set to the appropriate position. Paper  
jams may occur if the lever is not set appropriately.  
Follow the procedure below to set the paper size  
switch lever.  
Open the duplex unit cover.  
1
Hold the opening at the center of the duplex  
unit cover and close it gently.  
Hold the opening at the center of the duplex  
unit cover and open it gently.  
Set the blue paper size switch lever (A) to  
the appropriate position according to the  
paper size.  
2
– For A4 size, draw the paper size switch lever  
toward you.  
– For LTR or LGL size, push the paper size switch  
lever toward the machine.  
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Paper Size and Type  
Setting Paper Size and Type  
This section describes how to specify the paper size and type you are loading in the paper  
cassette and the multi-purpose tray. Whenever you change the paper size and type in the  
cassette and the tray, follow the procedure in this section to adjust the paper size and type  
settings for the cassette and the tray.  
For the Paper Cassette  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the paper type,  
3
The default settings are as follows:  
<PAPER SIZE>: <LTR>  
PAPER TYPE(CASS)  
PLAIN PAPER  
<PAPER TYPE>: <PLAIN PAPER>  
Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to  
select <CASSETTE 1> or <CASSETTE 2>,  
then press [OK].  
You can select from the following paper types:  
<PLAIN PAPER>, <PLAIN PAPER L>*,  
<RECYCLED>, <COLOR>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>  
* If paper curls excessively when printed with  
<PLAIN PAPER> selected, select <PLAIN PAPER  
L>.  
1
CASSETTE 1  
For the Multi-Purpose Tray  
<CASSETTE 2> is displayed only if the optional  
paper cassette is attached.  
You can register a frequently used paper size and  
type for the multi-purpose tray. The default setting  
is <OFF>.  
Press  
or  
to select the paper size,  
2
then press [OK].  
PAPER SIZE(CASS)  
Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to  
select <MP TRAY>, then press [OK].  
LTR  
1
You can select from the following paper sizes:  
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIV>,  
<OFICIO>, <BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-  
OFICIO>, <GOVERNMENT-LETTER>,  
<GOVERNMENT-LEGAL>, <FOOLSCAP>, <A-  
FLS>  
MP TRAY  
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Paper Size and Type  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the paper type,  
2
3
4
MP TRAY STD SET  
PAPER TYPE(TRAY)  
PLAIN PAPER  
ON  
If you select <OFF>, the display for specifying  
the paper size and type for the multi-purpose  
tray appears every time you load paper in the  
multi-purpose tray.  
You can select from the following paper types:  
<PLAIN PAPER>, <PLAIN PAPER L>*1,  
<RECYCLED>, <COLOR>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>,  
<HEAVY PAPER 2>*2, <TRANSPARENCY>*3,  
<LABELS>, <ENVELOPE>  
*1 If paper curls excessively when printed with  
<PLAIN PAPER> selected, select <PLAIN PAPER  
L>.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the paper size,  
*2 If print fixing is not sufficient when printed  
with <HEAVY PAPER 1> selected, select  
<HEAVY PAPER 2>.  
PAPER SIZE(TRAY)  
LTR  
*3 <TRANSPARENCY> can be selected only if  
<LTR> or <A4> is selected as the paper size.  
You can select from the following paper types:  
<LTR>, <LGL>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, <EXECUTIV>,  
<NO.10 (COM10)>*1, <CAT. GLOVE NO.8>*1,  
<DL>*1, <ISO-C5>*1, <ISO-B5>*1, <OFICIO>,  
<BRAZIL-OFICIO>, <MEXICO-OFICIO>,  
<GOVERNMENT-LETTER>, <GOVERNMENT-  
LEGAL>, <FOOLSCAP>, <A-FLS>, <CUSTOM  
SIZE>*2  
*1 For envelopes: If you select this size,  
<ENVELOPE> is automatically selected for the  
paper type, and the display for selecting the  
paper type does not appear.  
*2 For non-standard paper size: If you select this  
size, enter the horizontal size in <X  
DIMENSION> (76 to 216 mm (3 to 8 1/2 inch))  
with  
[numeric keys], then press [OK].  
Enter the vertical size in <Y DIMENSION> (127  
to 356 mm (5 to 14 1/8 inch)) with  
[numeric keys], then press [OK]. You  
can also press or to specify the size.  
(<Y DIMENSION> represents the length of the  
paper that feeds into the machine.)  
When <NO.10 (COM10)>, <CAT. GLOVE NO.8>,  
<DL>, <ISO-C5>, <OFICIO>, <FOOLSCAP>, <A-  
FLS>, or non-standard paper size is set, the  
machine may perform printing even if a different  
size paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray.  
Make sure the correct size paper is loaded before  
printing.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Tray  
Output Tray  
This section describes the features of the output trays.  
Output Tray Type  
When outputting LGL size paper, lift the paper  
stopper to prevent the paper from falling off the  
output tray.  
This machine has two output trays: the output tray  
on the front side of the machine and the sub-  
output tray on the rear side of the machine.  
Do not switch one output tray to another during  
printing. This may result in paper jams.  
Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the output  
area. Even if the machine is not printing, sudden rotation of the  
roller may catch your hands or clothing, resulting in personal  
injury.  
Output Tray  
Printed paper is output to the output tray with the  
The surroundings of the output tray are hot during printing or  
immediately after printing. When taking out of the paper or  
removing jammed paper, do not touch the surroundings of the  
output tray.  
printed side facing down.  
– Printed paper can be output only to the output tray when  
performing 2-sided copying or printing.  
– During 2-sided copying or printing, do not touch the paper  
until it is output to the output tray completely. In 2-sided  
copying or printing, the paper is partially output after one side  
is printed and then fed back to the machine so that the  
reverse side can be printed.  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Paper Size and Type  
Sub-output Tray  
Selecting the Output Tray  
Printed paper is output to the sub-output tray on  
the rear side of the machine with the printed side  
facing up. Printed paper is stacked in reverse page  
order. The sub-output tray is suitable for use when  
printing transparencies, labels, or envelopes that  
curl easily, because the printed paper remains flat  
when output.  
Swꢀtchꢀng to the Sub-output Tray  
To switch from the output tray to the sub-output  
tray, open the sub-output tray.  
Swꢀtchꢀng to the Output Tray  
To switch from the sub-output tray to the output  
tray, close the sub-output tray.  
The surroundings of the sub-output tray are hot during printing  
or immediately after printing. When taking out of the paper or  
removing jammed paper, do not touch the surroundings of the  
sub-output tray.  
– Make sure to close the sub-output tray before performing 2-  
sided copying or printing.  
– Do not open the sub-output tray during 2-sided copying or  
printing.  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Copying  
3
This chapter describes the copying features.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of Copy Functions  
Overview of Copy Functions  
In addition to enlarging/reducing copies, you can make 2-sided copies or use the 2 on 1  
mode, which reduces 2 page documents to fit on one sheet of paper.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of Copy Functions  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Copying Method  
Basic Copying Method  
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.  
Place documents on the platen glass or  
load them in the ADF.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
1
2
3
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
– The copy quantity appears on the right side of  
the display.  
– If you make a mistake when entering values,  
press [Clear] and enter the correct values.  
You cannot change the copy quantity while the  
machine is copying.  
– For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
– Close the ADF after placing your documents.  
– For documents you can copy, see“Documents  
Press [Start].  
4
Press  
[COPY].  
You can make copy settings and scan documents  
even if the machine is currently printing. The  
scanned documents are processed after the  
current job is complete. You can reserve up to 5  
copy jobs, with different settings for each job.  
– The COPY indicator lights up and the machine  
enters the copy standby mode.  
– If you want to adjust the image quality, see  
– If you want to adjust the density, see  
– If you want to adjust the zoom ratio, see  
If you press and hold [OK] in the copy mode, a  
sample page will be printed. For details, see  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Canceling Copy Jobs  
Canceling Copy Jobs  
This section describes how to cancel copy jobs.  
Canceling Reserved Jobs  
Canceling Scanning or Outgoing  
Jobs  
You can cancel a copy job while it is printing or  
waiting to be processed.  
You can cancel scanning or outgoing jobs.  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <COPY STATUS> or  
<JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].  
1
2
3
If you cancel a copy job during scanning, make sure to remove  
the document.  
Press [Stop/Reset].  
COPY STATUS  
1
When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message  
If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press  
select <COPY>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
2
appears, press [OK].  
Press  
list.  
or  
to scroll through the job  
When scanning using the ADF:  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
PRESS OK KEY  
0001  
15:50 PRINTING  
1 X  
10/  
20  
When scanning using the platen glass:  
If you want to delete a job, go to the next step.  
Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
Press  
or  
to select the job you  
want to delete, then press [OK].  
When the <CANCEL?> message appears,  
3
press  
to select <YES>.  
0003  
15:52  
1 X  
0 /  
50  
CANCEL?  
< YES  
NO >  
If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, skip to  
step 5.  
The display will return to the standby mode.  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Canceling Copy Jobs  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <CANCEL>,  
4
5
0 0 0 3  
C A N C E L  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
CANCEL?  
< YES  
NO >  
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
select <NO>.  
to  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
6
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Paper Source  
Selecting Paper Source  
You can manually specify a paper source (paper cassette (1 or 2) or multi-purpose tray) by  
pressing [Paper Select].  
The suffix <R> (such as in LTRR), used in paper size designations, indicates that the paper is loaded in the paper cassette or the  
multi-purpose tray horizontally.  
Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to  
select the paper cassette 1 or the paper  
cassette 2*.  
Copying on Papers in Paper  
Cassettes  
3
4
The paper select indicator of the selected paper  
source lights up. (See“Operation Panel,on p. 1-  
You need to set up the paper size and type for each  
paper source in advance. For details about  
configuring the paper size and type, see “Setting  
* The paper cassette 2 is optional.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
Place documents.  
1
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Paper Source  
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray with  
Standard Paper Sizes  
Press [Start].  
5
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
This section describes how to copy onto standard  
size papers using the multi-purpose tray.  
– You can set the machine to automatically select  
the appropriate paper source based on the  
document’s size and copy ratio settings (Auto  
Paper Selection). You can also set the machine  
to automatically select another paper source  
with the same paper size if the current paper  
source runs out of paper while processing a job  
(Auto Cassette Switching). For details, see  
“Setting Auto Paper Selection/Auto Cassette  
Switching,in the e-Manual.  
– You can set the default paper source for  
copying (<AUTO>, <CASSETTE 1>, or  
<CASSETTE 2> (optional)) in <PAPER SELECT>  
in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in <COPY  
SETTINGS>.  
If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the  
paper size and type for the multi-purpose tray appear every  
time you load paper on the multi-purpose tray. If <MP TRAY STD  
SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the  
registered paper size and type. (SeeSetting Paper Size and Type,”  
on p. 2-17.)  
Place documents.  
1
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to  
select the multi-purpose tray.  
The paper select indicator of the selected paper  
source lights up. (See“Operation Panel,on p. 1-  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Paper Source  
Load the papers into the multi-purpose  
tray.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the paper type,  
4
5
6
SELECT PAPER TYPE  
PLAIN PAPER  
– To copy onto standard size papers, select the  
paper type from the followings:  
<PLAIN PAPER>, <PLAIN PAPER L>, <COLOR>,  
<RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY  
PAPER 2>, <TRANSPARENCY>, or <LABELS>.  
– For details, see“Paper Requirements,on p. 2-6  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, go to  
the next step.  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <ON>, skip to  
step 7.  
<TRANSPARENCY> can be selected only if <LTR>  
or <A4> is selected as the paper size.  
Press  
or  
to select the paper size,  
then press [OK].  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
SELECT PAPER SIZE  
LTR  
7
8
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
– To copy onto standard size papers, select the  
paper size from the followings:  
<LTR>, <EXECUTIV>, <A4>, <B5>, <A5>, or  
<LGL>.  
– For details, see“Paper Requirements,on p. 2-6  
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray with  
Irregular Paper Sizes  
This section describes how to copy onto non-  
standard size paper using the multi-purpose tray.  
If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the  
paper size and type for the multi-purpose tray appear every  
time you load paper on the multi-purpose tray. If <MP TRAY STD  
SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the  
registered paper size and type. (SeeSetting Paper Size and Type,”  
on p. 2-17.)  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Paper Source  
Place documents.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
1
6
7
horizontal size in <X DIMENSION> (76 to  
216 mm (3 to 8 1/2 inch)), then press [OK].  
X DIMENSION  
76 mm  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
vertical size in <Y DIMENSION> (127 to  
356 mm (5 to 14 1/8 inch)), then press  
[OK].  
Y DIMENSION  
127 mm  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
You can also press  
(<Y DIMENSION> represents the length of the  
paper that feeds into the machine.)  
or  
to specify the size.  
2
3
Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to  
select the multi-purpose tray.  
The paper select indicator of the selected paper  
source lights up. (See“Operation Panel,on p. 1-  
When a non-standard paper size is set, the  
machine may perform printing even if a different  
size paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray.  
Make sure the correct size paper is loaded before  
printing.  
Load the paper into the multi-purpose  
tray.  
4
Press  
or  
to select the paper type,  
8
9
then press [OK].  
SELECT PAPER TYPE  
PLAIN PAPER  
– To copy onto non-standard size paper, select  
the paper type from the followings:  
<PLAIN PAPER>, <PLAIN PAPER L>, <COLOR>,  
<RECYCLED>, <HEAVY PAPER 1>, <HEAVY  
PAPER 2>, <LABELS>, or <ENVELOPE>.  
– For details, see“Paper Requirements,on p. 2-6  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, go to  
the next step.  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <ON>, skip to  
step 7.  
Press  
or  
to select <CUSTOM  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
SIZE>, then press [OK].  
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
SELECT PAPER SIZE  
CUSTOM SIZE  
100%  
CUSTM  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Paper Source  
Load envelopes into the multi-purpose  
tray.  
Press [Start].  
4
5
10  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
Using the Multi-Purpose Tray with  
Envelopes  
This section describes how to copy onto envelopes  
using the multi-purpose tray.  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, go to  
the next step.  
– If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <ON>, skip to  
step 6.  
If <MP TRAY STD SET> is set to <OFF>, the display to specify the  
paper size and type for the multi-purpose tray appear every  
time you load paper on the multi-purpose tray. If <MP TRAY STD  
SET> is set to <ON>, copying can be performed only for the  
registered paper size and type. (SeeSetting Paper Size and Type,”  
on p. 2-17.)  
Press  
or  
to select the paper size,  
then press [OK].  
Place documents.  
SELECT PAPER SIZE  
NO.10 (COM10)  
1
– To copy onto envelopes, select the paper size  
from the followings:  
<NO.10 (COM10)>, <CAT. GLOVE NO.8>,  
<DL>, <ISO-C5>, or <ISO-B5>.  
– If you select one of these size, <ENVELOPE> is  
automatically selected for the paper type.  
– For details, see“Paper Requirements,on p. 2-6  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
When <NO.10 (COM10)>, <CAT. GLOVE NO.8>,  
<DL>, or <ISO-C5> is set, the machine may  
perform printing even if a different size paper is  
loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Make sure the  
correct size paper is loaded before printing.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
Press [Paper Select] repeatedly to  
select the multi-purpose tray.  
Press [Start].  
The paper select indicator of the selected paper  
source lights up. (See“Operation Panel,on p. 1-  
6
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Image Quality  
Selecting Image Quality  
You can adjust the image quality of copies according to the types of documents. A correct  
selection is necessary for the optimal reproduction of the colors of the document. These  
settings return to the default values if the Auto Clear function is activated or if you press  
[Stop/Reset]. The default setting is <TEXT/PHOTO>.  
– Combinations of these four modes (TEXT/PHOTO, TEXT/PHOTO+, TEXT, and PHOTO) cannot be selected at the same time.  
If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.  
– If the document is a transparency, select the document type, then adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for  
the document.  
Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to  
select the document type.  
Place documents.  
3
1
2
– <TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain  
text and photos.  
– <TEXT/PHOTO+>: For documents that  
contain fine text and photos.  
– <TEXT>: For text documents.  
– <PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine  
text or photos.  
Copy density automatically changes to the  
manual mode when <TEXT/PHOTO>, <TEXT/  
PHOTO+>, or <PHOTO> is set.  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Image Quality  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
5
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Density  
Adjusting Density  
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document either  
automatically or manually. The default setting is <MANUAL> (5).  
Adjusting Automatically  
Press [Density] repeatedly to select  
<AUTO DENSITY>, then press [OK].  
3
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate  
level for the document automatically.  
DENSITY  
AUTO DENSITY  
Place documents.  
1
The image quality is automatically set to <TEXT>.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
5
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
100%  
A
LTR  
01  
TEXT  
Press [Start].  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting Density  
Adjusting Manually  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
6
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate  
level for the document manually.  
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Place documents.  
1
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
4
Press [Density] repeatedly to select the  
manual mode.  
Press  
or  
to adjust the copy  
density, then press [OK].  
DENSITY  
-LT  
DK+  
: to make light documents darker  
: to make dark documents lighter  
– To cancel all settings, press  
– When you switch the mode by pressing the  
mode keys such as [SEND/FAX]/  
[Stop/Reset].  
[FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If  
you want to keep the settings, set the density as  
follows:  
[Menu] <COPY SETTINGS> <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> <DENSITY> <MANUAL> (See  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enlarge/Reduce Images  
Enlarge/Reduce Images  
You can convert a standard-sized document to a different standard-sized copy (preset  
zoom), or you can enlarge or reduce images in 1% increments (custom copy ratio). The  
default setting is <100%>.  
Press [Enlarge/Reduce].  
Preset Zoom  
3
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents  
to another standard paper size.  
PRESET RATIO  
100%  
-
+
Place documents.  
1
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Enlarge/Reduce Images  
Place documents.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the copy ratio,  
1
4
PRESET RATIO  
78% LGL  
LTR  
– <200% MAX.>  
– <129% STMT LTR>  
– <100%>  
– <78% LGL LTR>  
– <64%>  
– <50% MIN.>  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
When <PAPER SIZE GROUP> in the <COPY  
SETTINGS> menu is set to <A> or <AB>, the  
preset copy ratios change as follows:  
A: 50%, 70%, 100%, 141%, 200%  
AB: 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%,  
141%, 200%  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
Press [Enlarge/Reduce] twice.  
ZOOM  
-
50-200%  
100%  
+
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
6
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
copy ratio, then press [OK].  
78%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
ZOOM  
-
50-200%  
95%  
+
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
You can also use  
ratio. To increase the copy ratio, press  
decrease the copy ratio, press  
or  
to adjust the copy  
. To  
.
Custom Copy Ratio  
To return the copy ratio to 100%, press  
[Enlarge/Reduce] repeatedly to display  
<100%>, then press [OK].  
You can enlarge or reduce images by any copy ratio,  
in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from  
50% to 200%.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enlarge/Reduce Images  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
6
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
95%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Collating Copies  
Collating Copies  
You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order. This function is useful when making  
handouts for meetings. This feature can be used together with both “2-Sided Copying” (see  
is <OFF>.  
Place documents.  
Press  
[COPY].  
1
2
If <COLLATE> is set to <ON> in <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> in <COPY SETTINGS>, skip to step 4.  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Collating Copies  
Press [Collate/2 on 1] repeatedly to  
select <COLLATE>, then press [OK].  
3
C O L L A T E  
– If you want to use <COLLATE> and“2 on 1  
select <COLLATE+2 ON 1>, then press [OK].  
– If you want to use <COLLATE> and the 2-  
sided copying at the same time, go to step 3  
Copying(see p. 3-27).  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
5
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
100% *  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page. When scanning is  
complete, press [OK]. The machine prints the  
remaining sets of copies.  
– To cancel all settings, press  
– When you switch the mode by pressing the  
mode keys such as [SEND/FAX]/  
[Stop/Reset].  
[FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If  
you want to keep the settings, set the collate  
mode as follows:  
[Menu] <COPY SETTINGS> <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> <COLLATE> <ON> (See“COPY  
– When scanning multiple page documents,  
<MEMORY FULL> may appear in the display  
and scanning may be canceled. If this happens,  
press [OK] to return to the standby mode, and  
print, send, or delete any documents stored in  
memory.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)  
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)  
This mode enables you to reduce two-page documents to fit on one sheet of paper (1-sided/  
2-sided).  
Place documents.  
2 on 1 Combination  
1
2 on 1 mode automatically reduces two documents  
to fit on the selected paper size. You can make well-  
organized copies by copying multiple documents  
onto one sheet. This mode enables you to cut print  
costs by saving copy papers, and it is also useful for  
saving space. This feature can be used together with  
Copying(see p. 3-24). The default setting is <OFF>.  
The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the documents fit  
onto the selected paper size.  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)  
Copying ID Card  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
You can make copies of a card printed on both sides  
like an ID card. The printed images on the front-  
back both sides of a paper are placed on exactly the  
same position like the original card.  
Press [Collate/2 on 1] repeatedly to  
select <2 ON 1>, then press [OK].  
2 ON 1  
– You must place a document on the platen glass when using  
this function.  
– The zoom ratio will automatically be set to <100%> with this  
feature. You cannot change the copy size.  
– If you want to use <2 ON 1> and“Collating  
Copies(see p. 3-19) at the same time, select  
<COLLATE+2 ON 1>, then press [OK].  
– The ID card copy function can be used for LTR size paper if  
you select <INCHES> in <PAPER SIZE GROUP> in <COPY  
SETTINGS>, and for A4 if you select <A> or <AB>.  
– When you select the ID card copy, the other copy settings you  
made, such as the copy ratio and paper size, will be canceled  
automatically.  
– If you want to use <2 ON 1> and the 2-sided  
copying at the same time, go to step 3 of“1 to  
Copying(see p. 3-27).  
– This function cannot be used with the 2 on 1 mode, the  
collating mode, or the 2-sided copying mode.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
5
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
Place a card on the platen glass.  
64% *  
LTR  
1
– Place a card as indicated below.  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page. When scanning is  
complete, press [OK].  
– Align the center of a card with the arrow  
mark.  
– To cancel all settings, press  
[Stop/Reset].  
– A maximum of 1/8" (4 mm) margin will be  
produced between the two reduced  
documents in 2 on 1 copying.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
Press [Collate/2 on 1] repeatedly to  
select <ID CARD COPY>, then press [OK].  
ID CARD COPY  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1)  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
100% *  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Press [Start].  
5
6
Turn and place the card.  
TURN OVER ID CARD  
SCAN  
:START  
– Place the card as indicated below.  
– Align the center of a card with the arrow  
mark.  
Press [Start].  
7
To cancel all settings, press  
[Stop/Reset]  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-Sided Copying  
2-Sided Copying  
This mode enables you to make 2-sided copies from 1-sided or 2-sided originals, or make 1-  
sided copies from 2-sided originals. This enables you to cut print costs in half when copying  
in large quantities. This feature can be used together with both “Collating Copies” (see p. 3-  
19) and “2 on 1 Combination” (see p. 3-21). The default setting is <OFF>.  
– Paper used to make 2-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:  
Paper size: LTR, A4 and LGL (envelopes cannot be used for 2-sided copying)  
Paper weight: 16 to 32 lb (60 to 120 g/m2)  
– Make sure to close the sub-output tray before making 2-sided copies.  
– Do not open the sub-output tray while making 2-sided copies.  
– When making 2-sided copies, make sure to confirm that the paper size switch lever on the rear side of the machine is set  
to the appropriate position. Paper jams may occur if the lever is not set appropriately. For details on how to set the paper  
size switch lever, see“Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever,on p. 2-16.  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-Sided Copying  
1 to 2-Sided Copying  
Press  
or  
to select <BOOK TYPE>  
4
or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].  
You can make 2-sided copies from 1-sided  
documents.  
TYPE OF OUTPUT  
BOOK TYPE  
Place documents.  
1
– <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the  
copy will have the same top-bottom  
orientation.  
– <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides  
of the copy will have the opposite top-  
bottom orientation.  
For the landscape oriented documents:  
When <BOOK TYPE> is selected, the front and  
back sides of the copy will have the opposite top-  
bottom orientation. When <CALENDAR TYPE> is  
selected, the front and back sides of the copy will  
have the same top-bottom orientation.  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
6
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select <1  
>2-SIDED>, then press [OK].  
100% *  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
1 > 2-SIDED  
Press [Start].  
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page. When scanning is  
complete, press [OK].  
If there are odd number of documents when the  
1-Sided to 2-Sided mode is used, the back side of  
the last copy is left blank.  
– To cancel all settings, press  
– When you switch the mode by pressing the  
mode keys such as [SEND/FAX]/  
[Stop/Reset].  
[FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If  
you want to keep the settings, store the settings  
as follows:  
[Menu] <COPY SETTINGS> <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> <2-SIDED> (See“COPY SETTINGS,”  
on p. 13-5.)  
– You can skip step 4. In this case, the machine  
scans 1-sided documents to make 2-sided,  
<BOOK TYPE> copies.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-Sided Copying  
2 to 2-Sided Copying  
Press  
or  
to select <BOOK TYPE>  
5
or <CALENDAR TYPE> for the output  
layout, then press [OK].  
You can make 2-sided copies from 2-sided  
documents.  
TYPE OF OUTPUT  
BOOK TYPE  
Place documents in the ADF.  
1
– <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the  
copy will have the same top-bottom  
orientation.  
– <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides  
of the copy will have the opposite top-  
bottom orientation.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
6
7
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
100% *  
LTR  
01  
Press  
[COPY].  
TEXT/PHOTO  
2
3
Press [Start].  
Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select  
<2 > 2-SIDED>, then press [OK].  
2 > 2-SIDED  
– To cancel all settings, press  
[Stop/Reset].  
– When you switch the mode by pressing the  
mode keys such as [SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If  
you want to keep the settings, store the settings  
as follows:  
[Menu] <COPY SETTINGS> <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> <2-SIDED> (See“COPY SETTINGS,”  
on p. 13-5.)  
– You can skip steps 4 and 5. In this case, the  
machine scans 2-sided documents in the  
<BOOK TYPE> orientation and outputs the  
same way.  
Press  
or  
to select <BOOK TYPE>  
4
or <CALENDAR TYPE> for the document  
layout, then press [OK].  
TYPE OF ORIGINAL  
BOOK TYPE  
– <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the  
document will have the same top-bottom  
orientation.  
– <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides  
of the document will have the opposite top-  
bottom orientation.  
– If you press [Start] in step 4 after selecting  
<CALENDAR TYPE>, the machine scans 2-sided  
documents in the <CALENDAR TYPE>  
orientation and outputs the same way.  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-Sided Copying  
2 to 1-Sided Copying  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
5
6
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
You can make 1-sided copies from 2-sided  
documents.  
100% *  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
Place documents in the ADF.  
1
Press [Start].  
You can skip step 4. In this case, the machine  
scans 2-sided documents in the <BOOK TYPE>  
orientation to make 1-sided copies.  
– To cancel all settings, press  
– When you switch the mode by pressing the  
mode keys such as [SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX], all settings will be also canceled. If  
you want to keep the settings, store the settings  
as follows:  
[Stop/Reset].  
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
2
3
[Menu] <COPY SETTINGS> <STANDARD  
SETTINGS> <2-SIDED> (See“COPY SETTINGS,”  
on p. 13-5.)  
Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select  
<2 >1-SIDED>, then press [OK].  
2 > 1-SIDED  
Press  
or  
to select <BOOK TYPE>  
4
or <CALENDAR TYPE>, then press [OK].  
TYPE OF ORIGINAL  
BOOK TYPE  
– <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the  
document will have the same top-bottom  
orientation.  
– <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides  
of the document will have the opposite top-  
bottom orientation.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting Sharpness  
Adjusting Sharpness  
You can set the sharpness of the copied image. The default setting is <5>.  
Place documents.  
Press  
or  
to select to adjust the  
1
5
sharpness (1 to 9), then press [OK].  
SHARPNESS  
5
The highest sharpness level is 9 and the lowest  
is 1. To copy text or lines clearly, select a high  
sharpness level. To copy documents containing  
printed images or other halftones, select a low  
sharpness level.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
6
7
8
For details, see“Placing Documents,on p. 2-4.  
Press  
[COPY].  
Press [Menu].  
2
3
Use  
(numeric keys) to enter the  
desired copy quantity (1 to 99).  
Press  
or  
to select <COPY  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
100%  
LTR  
01  
TEXT/PHOTO  
MENU  
3.COPY SETTINGS  
Press [Start].  
9
If you want to copy multiple documents using  
the platen glass, place a document and press  
[Start] once for each page.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <SHARPNESS>,  
4
COPY SETTINGS  
2.SHARPNESS  
3
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Paper Size Group  
Selecting Paper Size Group  
This section describes how to select the paper size group. The default setting is <INCHES>.  
Press [Menu].  
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <COPY  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
3.COPY SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <PAPER SIZE  
3
4
GROUP>, then press [OK].  
COPY SETTINGS  
3.PAPER SIZE GROUP  
Press  
or  
to select a paper size  
group, then press [OK].  
PAPER SIZE GROUP  
INCHES  
You can select from the following paper size  
groups: <INCHES>, <A>, <AB>  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
5
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing Standard Mode  
Changing Standard Mode  
The Standard mode is the combination of copy modes that the machine automatically  
applies when the power is turned ON, or when [Stop/Reset] is pressed. You can change  
the Standard mode to suit your needs. The default settings are as follows:  
– <IMAGE QUALITY>: <TEXT/PHOTO>  
– <DENSITY>: <MANUAL> (5)  
– <ZOOM RATIO>: <PRESET RATIO> (100%)  
– <COPIES>: <1>  
– <COLLATE>: <OFF>  
– <2-SIDED>: <OFF>  
– <PAPER SELECT>: <AUTO>  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
1
2
4
5
setting item, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <COPY  
STANDARD SETTINGS  
1.IMAGE QUALITY  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
3.COPY SETTINGS  
You can specify the following settings:  
<IMAGE QUALITY>, <DENSITY>, <ZOOM  
RATIO>, <COPIES>, <COLLATE>, <2-SIDED>,  
<PAPER SELECT>  
Press  
or  
to select <STANDARD  
3
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
COPY SETTINGS  
1.STANDARD SETTINGS  
If you press  
the setting will not be registered.  
[Stop/Reset] before pressing [OK],  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initializing the Standard Mode  
Initializing the Standard Mode  
This section describes how to initialize the current copy setting mode including standard  
mode.  
Press [Menu].  
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <COPY  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
3.COPY SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <INIT. COPY  
3
SET.>, then press [OK].  
COPY SETTINGS  
4.INIT. COPY SET.  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
4
5
OK TO INITIALIZE?  
< YES  
NO >  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing a Sample Page  
Printing a Sample Page  
This machine provides you to print a sample page. You can use this function to test how the  
printouts will look with current settings.  
– The paper size must be LTR.  
– The paper type must be Plain Paper (16 to 21 lb (60 to 80 g/m2)).  
– Make sure that the paper setting is appropriate and the paper is loaded correctly. No error message is displayed, even if  
the sample page is not printed correctly.  
– You cannot cancel printing a sample page once printing has started.  
– You cannot use this function while making copies, scanning documents, or printing reports/lists.  
Press  
[COPY].  
1
2
Press and hold [OK].  
The sample page will be printed on both sides  
of the paper.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of the Print Functions  
Overview of the Print Functions  
2-sided printouts, collated printouts and enlarged/reduced printouts are available.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Print Functions  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Using Print Functions  
Introduction to Using Print Functions  
Normally, the series of operations involved in printing data from a computer is specified by  
control commands generated using a printer driver. Control commands are a command  
system for controlling a printer. For example, when printing using a printer driver, control  
commands print data according to the following flow.  
Using a printer driver, data to be printed is converted to control commands.  
Control command data is sent to the machine.  
Following the received control commands, the machine processes and prints the data.  
To print in the following printer modes, a Printer Driver supported by this machine must be installed.  
For installing the driver to send a print job to the machine over a network, see “Network  
Connection” in the Starter Guide.  
For installing the driver to send a print job directly from your Computer to the machine, see  
“USB Connection” in the Starter Guide.  
This machine supports the following two kinds of control commands:  
UFRII LT Mode  
UFR (Ultra Fast Rendering) is printing technology developed by Canon. High-speed printing is made possible  
by sharing the processing of print data normally done by the machine with the computer.  
PCL Mode  
PCL (Print Control Language), developed by Hewlett-Packard, is a command system for controlling page  
printers. Command versions supported by this machine are PCL5e and PCL6.  
– If you disconnect the USB cable before the print job is complete, the current operation may not be performed properly. Do not  
disconnect the USB cable until all the pages are printed out completely.  
– The PCL printing function is available only for the D1180.  
– The available printer drivers may vary, depending on the machine and the version of Windows that you are using.  
– If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver Information  
Assist Service in the server PC in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the Job Accounting feature. For  
instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, seeSet Up Computers and Softwarein the Starter Guide.  
– Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine,  
the settings from the printer driver have priority.  
– For information on the machines supported by the UFRII LT printer drivers, see Canon Products Supported by UFRII Drivers.  
– For information on the machines supported by the PCL5e, PCL6 printer drivers, see Canon Products Supported by PCL Drivers.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-4  
 
Printing Documents from a Computer  
Printing Documents from a Computer  
This section is the explanation of the basic procedure for printing from a computer (printer  
driver). Make sure that the printer driver is installed on your computer. To check if the driver  
is installed, see “Set Up Computers and Software” in the Starter Guide. For details on the  
printer driver settings, see Online Help.  
– Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals  
provided with the application software.  
– If you are using a shared printer in the Print Server (Point and Print) environment, it is necessary to install the Canon Driver  
Information Assist Service in the server computer in order to set up the printer configuration automatically or to use the  
Job Accounting feature. For instructions on how to install the Canon Driver Information Assist Service, seeSet Up  
Computers and Software,in the Starter Guide.  
– The machine may not be able to print data such as color photos if the data size of a single page is too large. If such is the  
case, reduce the data size by lowering the resolution or by changing the file format.  
– The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000. The display may differ depending on  
the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer drivers.  
– Printing speed may be slower when sending an e-mail or scanning documents to a file server in B&W format.  
Open the document you want to print  
from the application.  
Select your printer from [Select Printer],  
then click [Page Setup].  
1
2
3
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.  
The printer name displayed in the printer driver  
screen is changed by setting in the [Printers]  
folder (or [Printers and Faxes]). To display the  
[Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]), see  
“Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand,in the e-  
Manual.  
The printer driver screen is displayed.  
The procedure to display the printer driver screen  
may differ depending on the applications you are  
using.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Documents from a Computer  
Configure the required settings in the  
printer driver screen.  
4
Click [Print].  
5
Printing starts.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scaling Documents  
Scaling Documents  
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a  
document created in letter size to print on statement, or enlarging a document created in  
statement size to print on letter.  
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to  
scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.  
– Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.  
– Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for  
the selected page size.  
– If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the  
application.  
– Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the  
machine, the settings from the printer driver have priority.  
– The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000. The display may differ depending on  
the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer drivers.  
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.  
Select the page size of the document you  
created in the application from [Page  
Size].  
1
2
p. 4-5 for details for details on how to display the  
printer driver screen.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Scaling Documents  
Select output size of the document from  
[Output Size].  
Click [Print].  
3
5
The document is scaled automatically according  
to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output  
Size].  
If you want to increase or decrease the  
magnification manually, check [Manual  
Scaling] specify the scaling ratio for  
[Scaling].  
4
If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%,  
the document is printed without scaling on the  
paper specified in [Output Size].  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
This mode enables you to reduce multiple pages to fit onto one sheet of paper. You can  
make well-organized documents by editing multiple materials onto one sheet. And you can  
cut down print costs by saving paper, and it is also useful for saving space.  
– Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies with the application you are using, do not use it together  
with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.  
– You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.  
– The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000. The display may differ depending on  
the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer drivers. Most settings of printing are made from the  
printer driver.  
– Although there are some settings which can be made from the machine, the settings from the printer driver have priority.  
Display the [Page Setup] sheet.  
Select the page layout from [Page  
Layout].  
1
2
p. 4-5 for details on how to display the printer  
driver screen.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet  
Select the page order from [Page Order].  
3
The output image is displayed in the preview  
area.  
Click [Print].  
4
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-Sided Printing  
2-Sided Printing  
This mode enables you to make 2-sided printing. You can cut down print costs by half when  
copying in large quantities.  
– For details on the printer driver settings, see Online Help.  
– The following procedures are explained using sample screens from Windows 2000. The display may differ depending on  
the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer drivers.  
– Most settings of printing are made from the printer driver. Although there are some settings which can be made from the  
machine, the settings from the printer driver have priority.  
– Make sure to close the sub-output tray before performing 2-sided printing.  
– Do not open the sub-output tray while performing 2-sided printing.  
– When performing 2-sided printing, make sure to confirm that the paper size switch lever on the rear side of the machine  
is set to the appropriate position. Paper jams may occur if the lever is not set appropriately. For details on how to set the  
paper size switch lever, see“Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever,on p. 2-16.  
– Only LTR, A4, and LGL size paper can be used for 2-sided printing.  
Display the [Finishing] sheet.  
Select binding edge for the printout from  
[Binding Location].  
1
2
3
4
p. 4-5 for details on how to display the printer  
driver screen.  
Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].  
Click [Print].  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs  
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs  
You can check the status of print jobs and cancel a job before the printing starts.  
Make sure that the Processing/Data indicator is on or blinking. When the Processing/Data indicator is off, there are no jobs in the  
memory of the print job status.  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <PRINT STATUS> or  
<JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
1
5
6
CANCEL?  
< YES  
NO >  
PRINT STATUS  
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
to select <NO>.  
If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press  
select <PRINT>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to scroll through the job  
2
3
4
list, and check the status of the print jobs.  
0001  
*
test.txt - Notepad  
If you want to cancel the job, go to the next  
step. Otherwise, skip to step 6.  
Press  
or  
to select the job you  
want to cancel, then press [OK].  
0003  
*
test.txt - Notepad  
If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, skip to  
step 5.  
Press  
or  
to select <CANCEL>,  
then press [OK].  
0 0 0 3  
C A N C E L  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Destinations  
in the Address Book  
5
(D1180/D1170/D1150)  
This chapter describes how to register destinations in the Address Book, and how to edit and erase registered  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About the Address Book  
About the Address Book  
The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, and file server destinations. The  
Address Book is divided into one-touch keys and coded dial codes. You can store up to 20  
destinations in one-touch keys, and 180 destinations in coded dial codes, for a total of 200  
destinations in the whole Address Book. You can also register multiple destinations of  
various types in a group address, and assign a one-touch key or coded dial code to this  
group.  
Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that  
destinations address each time you send a job.  
– The Address Book feature is available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
– E-mail and file server address registration is available for the D1180/D1170.  
– Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can be imported into the  
machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, seeExporting Address Book Entries,in the e-Manual.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Registering Fax Numbers in One-  
Touch Keys  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL NUMBER  
6
7
ENTRY>, then press [OK].  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
fax numbers in the one-touch keys.  
Press [Menu].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
1
[Tone] to enter the fax number you  
want to register (40 digits maximum),  
then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
Ex.  
MENU  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
123XXXXXXX  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
8
9
Press  
or  
to select <1-TOUCH SPD  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
Press  
or  
to select a one-touch key  
(01 to 20) for which you want to register  
the fax number, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
NAME  
John  
:a  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
[01] NOT REGISTERED  
– If you want to specify the following optional  
settings (<LONG DISTANCE>, <TX SPEED>,  
and <ECM>) for the fax number you are  
registering, go to the next step.  
– If you do not need to set these options, skip  
to step 18.  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX>, then  
5
press [OK].  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
FAX  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press  
or  
to select the sending  
15  
speed (33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, or  
4800bps), then press [OK].  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
TX SPEED  
33600bps  
Press  
or  
to select <OPTIONAL  
10  
11  
12  
13  
SETTING>, then press [OK].  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
3.OPTIONAL SETTING  
If transmission errors occur frequently, lower the  
speed.  
Press  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <ECM>, then  
16  
17  
press [OK].  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
ON  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
3.ECM  
Press  
or  
to select <LONG  
DISTANCE>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> to reduce  
system and line errors while sending to or  
receiving from other machines that  
support ECM, then press [OK].  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
1.LONG DISTANCE  
ECM  
Press  
or  
to select the most  
ON  
effective transmission option, then press  
[OK].  
To register another one-touch key, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
LONG DISTANCE  
DOMESTIC  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
18  
– <DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option.  
– <LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these  
options when you make an international call.  
If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the  
setting from <LONG DISTANCE1 > through  
<LONG DISTANCE 3>.  
Registering E-Mail Addresses in  
One-Touch Keys  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
e-mail addresses in the one-touch keys.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SPEED>,  
14  
then press [OK].  
Press [Menu].  
1
OPTIONAL SETTING  
2.TX SPEED  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
8
9
MENU  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[numeric keys],  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <1-TOUCH SPD  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
NAME  
John(e-mail)  
:a  
To register another one-touch key, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
Press  
or  
to select a one-touch key  
(01 to 20) for which you want to register  
the address, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
10  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
[01] NOT REGISTERED  
Registering File Server Addresses  
in One-Touch Keys  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
file server addresses in the one-touch keys.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <E-MAIL>, then  
5
6
7
Press [Menu].  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
E-MAIL  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
Press  
or  
to select <E-MAIL  
ADDRESS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
1.E-MAIL ADDRESS  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the address you want  
to register (120 digits maximum), then  
press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <1-TOUCH SPD  
3
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
Ex.  
E-MAIL ADDRESS  
:a  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press  
or  
to select a one-touch key  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <FILE PATH>,  
4
(01 to 20) for which you want to register  
the address, then press [OK].  
10  
11  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
3.FILE PATH  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
[01] NOT REGISTERED  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
[Tone] to specify the folder to which  
the job is to be sent (120 characters  
maximum), then press [OK].  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <SMB>, then  
5
6
7
Ex.  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
FILE PATH  
server1/home/share  
:a  
SMB  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <HOST NAME>,  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <LOGIN NAME>,  
12  
13  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
1.HOST NAME  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
4.LOGIN NAME  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the name of the file  
server on the network (120 characters  
maximum), then press [OK].  
[Tone] to enter the login name (24  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
Ex.  
Ex.  
LOGIN NAME  
canon  
:a  
HOST NAME  
server1  
:1  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <PASSWORD>,  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
14  
15  
8
9
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
5.PASSWORD  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the password (14  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
Ex.  
PASSWORD  
123XXXX  
:a  
Ex.  
NAME  
:1  
SERVER 1  
To register another one-touch key, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/  
16  
5
6
TEL NO>, then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
Registering Group Addresses in  
One-Touch Keys  
Select the destinations you want to  
register in the group (199 destinations  
maximum) until all destinations are  
registered, then press [OK].  
The Group Address feature enables you to create a  
group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single  
destination.  
Ex.  
The destinations must be registered in the one-touch keys  
beforehand.  
=123XXXXXXX  
[01]John  
Press [Menu].  
To enter a destination stored under a one-touch  
key, press the desired one-touch key.  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
You can review the destinations which have been  
MENU  
already entered with  
or  
.
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
7
8
Press  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
GROUP DIAL  
2.NAME  
3
4
then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the group name (16  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select an empty one-  
Ex.  
touch key that you want to set as the  
group address, then press [OK].  
NAME  
Canon Group  
:a  
GROUP DIAL  
[10] NOT REGISTERED  
To register another group, repeat the procedure  
from step 4.  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
9
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press  
repeatedly to go back to the  
6
7
character or number you want to change,  
then press [Clear].  
This section describes the procedure for editing the  
fax, e-mail and file server addresses registered in  
the one-touch keys.  
Ex.  
NAME  
John  
:a  
Press [Menu].  
1
– When you edit a fax number, go back to the  
wrong digit with  
– To delete the entire entry, press and hold  
[Clear].  
.
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
MENU  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
[Tone] to enter a new character or  
number, then press [OK].  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Ex.  
NAME  
:a  
Canon  
Press  
or  
to select <1-TOUCH SPD  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
Press  
or  
to select a one-touch key  
(01 to 20) you want to edit, then press  
[OK].  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to edit the desired  
items.  
8
9
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
[01]John  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
Editing One-Touch Keys (Group  
Addresses)  
Press  
or  
to select the item you  
5
want to edit, then press [OK].  
This section describes the procedure for adding a  
new destination to the group, deleting a destination  
from the group, or changing the group name  
registered in one-touch keys.  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
You can edit the following items:  
– Fax: <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <NAME>,  
<OPTIONAL SETTING>  
Press [Menu].  
1
– E-Mail: <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, <NAME>  
– File server: <HOST NAME>, <NAME>, <FILE  
PATH>, <LOGIN NAME>, <PASSWORD>  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
If you want to delete a destination from the  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
group:  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/TEL  
NO>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
or  
to display the destination  
you want to delete from the group, then  
press [Clear].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
3
4
Ex.  
=123XXXXXXX  
[01]John  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Repeat step if you want to delete  
another destination.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select a group to edit,  
Press [OK].  
If you want to change the group name:  
GROUP DIAL  
[10] GROUP DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
press [OK].  
If you want to add a new destination to the  
group:  
GROUP DIAL  
2.NAME  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/TEL  
NO>, then press [OK].  
Press  
repeatedly to go back to a wrong  
character, then press [Clear].  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
Ex.  
NAME  
:a  
Canon Group  
Select the destination you want to add to  
the group, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
=234XXXXXXX  
[02]sales  
To delete the entire name, press and hold  
[Clear].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone]  
to enter a new character, then press [OK].  
For details on specifying a destination from  
Ex.  
NAME  
:a  
Sales Group  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL NUMBER  
5
6
ENTRY>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, or <HOST  
NAME>, then press [OK].  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
5
Press and hold [Clear] to erase the  
entire entry, then press [OK].  
Erasing One-Touch Keys  
This section describes the procedure for erasing  
addresses registered under one-touch keys.  
If you erase the fax number or e-mail address, or  
file server address, the registered name is cleared  
automatically.  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
2
7
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
or  
to select <1-TOUCH SPD  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
1.1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select a one-touch key  
(01 to 20) you want to erase, then press  
[OK].  
1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
[01]John  
You can also select a one-touch key by pressing  
the corresponding one-touch key.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys  
Erasing One-Touch Keys (Group  
Addresses)  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
This section describes the procedure for erasing  
group addresses registered under one-touch keys.  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
3
4
5
6
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select a group to  
delete, then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
[10] GROUP DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/  
TEL NO>, then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
Press [Clear] repeatedly until all  
destinations are deleted, then press [OK].  
When you delete all destinations, the registered  
name is cleared automatically.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Registering Fax Numbers in Coded  
Dial Codes  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL NUMBER  
6
7
ENTRY>, then press [OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
fax numbers in the coded dial codes.  
Press [Menu].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
1
[Tone] to enter the fax number you  
want to register (40 digits maximum),  
then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
Ex.  
MENU  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
123XXXXXXX  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
8
9
Press  
or  
to select <CODED SPD  
CODED SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
Press  
or  
to select a coded dial  
code (000 to 179) for which you want to  
register the fax number, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
NAME  
John  
:a  
CODED SPD DIAL  
[*000]NOT REGISTERED  
– If you want to specify the following optional  
settings (<LONG DISTANCE>, <TX SPEED>,  
and <ECM>) for the fax number you are  
registering, go to the next step.  
You can also select a coded dial code by  
pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired  
three-digit code.  
– If you do not need to set these options, skip  
to step 18.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <FAX>, then  
5
CODED SPD DIAL  
FAX  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Press  
or  
to select <OPTIONAL  
Press  
or  
to select the sending  
10  
11  
12  
13  
SETTING>, then press [OK].  
15  
speed (33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, or  
4800bps), then press [OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
3.OPTIONAL SETTING  
TX SPEED  
33600bps  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
If transmission errors occur frequently, lower the  
speed.  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
ON  
Press  
or  
to select <LONG  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ECM>, then  
DISTANCE>, then press [OK].  
16  
17  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
1.LONG DISTANCE  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
3.ECM  
Press  
or  
to select the most  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> to reduce  
effective transmission option, then press  
[OK].  
system and line errors while sending to or  
receiving from other machines that  
support ECM, then press [OK].  
LONG DISTANCE  
DOMESTIC  
ECM  
ON  
– <DOMESTIC>: Normally select this option.  
– <LONG DISTANCE 1-3>: Select one of these  
options when you make an international call.  
If errors occur during fax transmissions, try the  
setting from <LONG DISTANCE1 > through  
<LONG DISTANCE 3>.  
To register another coded dial code, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
18  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SPEED>,  
Registering E-Mail Addresses in  
Coded Dial Codes  
14  
then press [OK].  
OPTIONAL SETTING  
2.TX SPEED  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
e-mail addresses in the coded dial codes.  
Press [Menu].  
1
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
8
9
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
CODED SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
Press  
or  
to select <CODED SPD  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
Press  
or  
to select a coded dial  
Ex.  
code (000 to 179) for which you want to  
register the address, then press [OK].  
NAME  
:a  
John(e-mail)  
CODED SPD DIAL  
[*000]NOT REGISTERED  
To register another coded dial code, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
You can also select a coded dial code by  
pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired  
three-digit code.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
10  
Press  
or  
to select <E-MAIL>, then  
Registering File Server Addresses  
in Coded Dial Codes  
5
6
7
press [OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
E-MAIL  
This section describes the procedure for registering  
file server addresses in the coded dial codes.  
Press  
or  
to select <E-MAIL  
Press [Menu].  
ADDRESS>, then press [OK].  
1
CODED SPD DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
1.E-MAIL ADDRESS  
2
MENU  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
[Tone] to enter the address you want  
to register (120 digits maximum), then  
press [OK].  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Ex.  
E-MAIL ADDRESS  
:a  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Press  
or  
to select <CODED SPD  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
8
9
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
CODED SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
Press  
or  
to select a coded dial  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
code (000 to 179) for which you want to  
register the address, then press [OK].  
[Tone] to enter the destination’s name  
(16 characters maximum), then press  
[OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
[*000]NOT REGISTERED  
Ex.  
NAME  
:1  
SERVER 1  
You can also select a coded dial code by  
pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired  
three-digit code.  
Press  
or  
to select <FILE PATH>,  
Press  
or  
to select <SMB>, then  
10  
11  
then press [OK].  
5
6
7
press [OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
3.FILE PATH  
CODED SPD DIAL  
SMB  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
Press  
or  
to select <HOST NAME>,  
[Tone] to specify the folder to which  
the job is to be sent (120 characters  
maximum), then press [OK].  
then press [OK].  
CODED SPD DIAL  
1.HOST NAME  
Ex.  
FILE PATH  
server1/home/share  
:a  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the name of the file  
server on the network (120 characters  
maximum), then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <LOGIN NAME>,  
12  
13  
then press [OK].  
Ex.  
CODED SPD DIAL  
4.LOGIN NAME  
HOST NAME  
server1  
:1  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the login name (24  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
Ex.  
LOGIN NAME  
Canon  
:a  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <PASSWORD>,  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
14  
15  
3
4
CODED SPD DIAL  
5.PASSWORD  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Press [Coded Dial], enter the three-  
digit code that you want to set as the  
group address, and then press [OK].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[Tone] to enter the password (14  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
Ex.  
GROUP DIAL  
PASSWORD  
123XXXX  
:a  
[*100]NOT REGISTERED  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/  
To register another coded dial code, repeat the  
procedure from step 4.  
5
6
TEL NO>, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
16  
Registering Group Addresses in  
Coded Dial Codes  
Select the destinations you want to  
register in the group (199 destinations  
maximum) until all destinations are  
registered, then press [OK].  
The Group Address feature enables you to create a  
group of up to 199 stored destinations as a single  
destination.  
Ex.  
=123XXXXXXX  
[*000]John  
The destinations must be registered in coded dial codes  
beforehand.  
To enter a destination stored under a coded dial  
code, press [Coded Dial], then enter the  
three-digit code with  
multiple entries, press [Coded Dial] between  
each entry.  
[numeric keys]. For  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
You can review the destinations which have been  
MENU  
already entered with  
or  
.
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <NAME>, then  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
7
GROUP DIAL  
2.NAME  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
Press  
or  
to select a coded dial  
8
9
[Tone] to enter the group name (16  
characters maximum), then press [OK].  
4
5
code (000 to 179) you want to edit, then  
press [OK].  
Ex.  
CODED SPD DIAL  
[*000]John  
NAME  
Canon Group  
:a  
You can also select a coded dial code by  
pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired  
three-digit code.  
To register another group, repeat the procedure  
from step 4.  
Press  
or  
to select the item you  
want to edit, then press [OK].  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
CODED SPD DIAL  
2.NAME  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
You can edit the following items:  
– Fax: <TEL NUMBER ENTRY>, <NAME>,  
<OPTIONAL SETTING>  
– E-Mail: <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, <NAME>  
– File server: <HOST NAME>, <NAME>, <FILE  
PATH>, <LOGIN NAME>, <PASSWORD>  
Editing Coded Dial Codes  
This section describes the procedure for editing the  
fax, e-mail and file server addresses in coded dial  
codes.  
Press  
repeatedly to go back to the  
6
7
character or number you want to change,  
then press [Clear].  
Press [Menu].  
Ex.  
1
2
NAME  
John  
:a  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
– When you edit a fax number, go back to the  
wrong digit with  
– To delete the entire entry, press and hold  
[Clear].  
.
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
[numeric keys],  
[Tone] to enter a new character or  
number, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <CODED SPD  
3
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
NAME  
Canon  
:a  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
■ If you want to add a new destination to  
the group:  
For information on how to enter characters, see  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/TEL  
NO>, then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 to edit the desired  
items.  
8
9
Select the destination you want to add to  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
the group, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
=234XXXXXXX  
[*002]sales  
Editing Coded Dial Codes (Group  
Addresses)  
This section describes the procedure for adding a  
new destination to the group, deleting a destination  
from the group, or changing the group name  
registered in the coded dial codes.  
For details on specifying a destination from  
Press [Menu].  
1
If you want to delete a destination from the  
group:  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/TEL  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
NO>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
or  
to display the destination  
you want to delete from the group, then  
press [Clear].  
Press  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
3
4
then press [OK].  
Ex.  
=123XXXXXXX  
[*000]John  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Repeat step if you want to delete  
Press [Coded Dial], enter the  
three-digit code using  
keys].  
another destination.  
[numeric  
④ Press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
[*100]GROUP DIAL  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
If you want to change the group name:  
Press or to select <NAME>, then  
Press  
or  
to select <CODED SPD  
3
4
DIAL>, then press [OK].  
press [OK].  
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
2.CODED SPD DIAL  
GROUP DIAL  
2.NAME  
Press  
or  
to select a coded dial  
Press  
repeatedly to go back to a wrong  
character, then press [Clear].  
code (000 to 179) you want to erase, then  
press [OK].  
Ex.  
CODED SPD DIAL  
[*000]John  
NAME  
Canon Group  
:a  
You can also select a coded dial code by  
pressing [Coded Dial] followed by the desired  
three-digit code.  
To delete the entire name, press and hold  
[Clear].  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL NUMBER  
5
6
ENTRY>, <E-MAIL ADDRESS>, or <HOST  
NAME>, then press [OK].  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone]  
CODED SPD DIAL  
1.TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
to enter a new character, then press [OK].  
Ex.  
NAME  
Sales Group  
:a  
Press and hold [Clear] to erase the  
entire entry, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
5
If you erase the fax number or e-mail address or  
file server address, the registered name is cleared  
automatically.  
Erasing Coded Dial Codes  
This section describes the procedure for erasing  
addresses registered under coded dial codes.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
2
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes  
Erasing Coded Dial Codes (Group  
Addresses)  
Press [Clear] repeatedly until all  
destinations are deleted, then press [OK].  
6
7
Follow the procedure below to delete all  
destinations from a group.  
When you delete all destinations, the registered  
name is cleared automatically.  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <ADDRESS  
BOOK SET.>, then press [OK].  
2
MENU  
5.ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
If a password has been set for the Address Book,  
enter the password using  
then press [OK].  
[numeric keys],  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <GROUP DIAL>,  
3
4
ADDRESS BOOK SET.  
3.GROUP DIAL  
Press [Coded Dial], enter the  
three-digit code of the group that you  
want to delete, and then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
[*100]GROUP DIAL  
Press  
or  
to select <SELECT ADD/  
5
TEL NO>, then press [OK].  
GROUP DIAL  
1.SELECT ADD/TEL NO  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fax (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
6
This chapter describes how to use fax functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of Fax Functions  
Overview of Fax Functions  
You can send and receive fax documents and also forward received fax documents to  
specified destinations.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of Fax Functions  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
This section describes the things that you must do before using fax functions. Make sure to  
set the following items first:  
Your fax number  
Register your machine’s fax number. (See “Registering Your Machine’s Fax Number,on p. 6-12.)  
Your personal name or company name  
Register your name or company name. (See “Registering the Machine’s Name,on p. 6-11.)  
Date and time  
Set the current date and time. (See “Setting the Current Date and Time,on p. 6-10.)  
Your telephone line type  
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine. (See “Setting the Type of Telephone  
Line,on p. 6-11.)  
Fax receiving mode  
Set how the machine receives fax documents to suit your needs. (See “Methods for Receiving Faxes,”  
on p. 6-4.)  
Methods for Receiving Faxes  
Your machine provides several methods for receiving fax documents. You can receive documents  
automatically or manually. Follow the chart below to choose the fax receive mode that best suits your needs.  
The default setting is <FaxOnly>.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
FaxOnly  
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically. Select this mode if you use the machine for fax  
operations only, and not for voice communications using an external telephone.  
Before using this mode  
Simply set the receive mode to <FaxOnly>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,on p. 6-10.)  
When an incoming call is received  
With no external telephone connected to the machine:  
For fax calls, the machine receives fax documents automatically.  
For telephone calls, you cannot talk to the caller.  
With external telephone connected to the machine:  
– If you want to change <INCOMING RING>, see “Setting the Incoming Ring,on p. 6-54.  
– Setting <RX JOB DONE TONE> to <ON> enables the machine to ring for helping you find fax documents are being received. (See  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
FaxTel  
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and the external telephone  
connected to the machine rings for telephone calls. (If <INCOMING RING> is set to <ON>, the external  
telephone rings for both fax and telephone calls. To set the telephone to ring only when a telephone call is  
received, set <INCOMING RING> to <OFF>.)  
Before using this mode  
Make sure to do the following:  
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Make Fax Settings,in the Starter Guide.)  
Set the receive mode to <FaxTel>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,on p. 6-10.)  
When an incoming call is received  
– If you want to change <RING START TIME>, <F/T RING TIME>, or <F/T SWITCH ACTION>, seeOptional Settings for FaxTel Mode,on  
– If you want to change <INCOMING RING>, see“Setting the Incoming Ring,on p. 6-54.  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
AnsMode  
In this mode, the machine receives documents automatically for fax calls and your answering machine records  
a message for telephone calls.  
Before using this mode  
Make sure to do the following:  
Connect your external telephone with built-in answering machine to the machine. (See “Make Fax Settings,”  
in the Starter Guide.)  
Set your answering machine to answer after 1 to 2 rings.  
Record a message on your answering machine. (When you record a message, we recommend you insert  
about 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the message, or limit the message to 20 seconds.)  
Set the receive mode to <AnsMode>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,on p. 6-10.)  
When an incoming call is received  
– This mode does not support voice mail.  
– Make sure to change the receive mode if you turn off your answering machine; otherwise, the machine cannot receive fax documents  
automatically.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
Manual  
In this mode, you can monitor all incoming calls by picking up the handset each time your telephone rings.  
This mode is a suitable option if you expect to use the machine mainly as a telephone, and only occasionally  
receive fax documents.  
Before using this mode  
Make sure to do the following:  
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Make Fax Settings,in the Starter Guide.)  
Set the receive mode to <Manual>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,on p. 6-10.)  
When an incoming call is received  
*If <REMOTE RX> is set to <ON>, you can also start to receive fax documents by dialing from your telephone.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
DRPD  
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) service assigns two or more telephone numbers with distinctive  
ring patterns to a single telephone line, allowing you to have both a fax number(s) and a telephone number(s)  
using only one telephone line. Your fax will automatically monitor incoming calls and based on the ring  
pattern, will let you know if the call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring pattern that matches the pattern  
assigned by your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for availability.  
Before using this mode  
Make sure to do the following:  
Subscribe to a DRPD service. Contact your telephone company for availability.  
Connect your external telephone to the machine. (See “Make Fax Settings,in the Starter Guide.)  
Set the receive mode to <DRPD>. (See “Selecting the Receive Mode,on p. 6-10.)  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
– <DRPD> (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection):  
Distinguishes between fax and voice calls  
using distinctive ring patterns. Select the ring  
pattern assigned by your telephone company.  
For optional settings, see“Optional Settings  
Selecting the Receive Mode  
You can set the fax receive mode to suit your needs.  
The default setting is <FaxOnly>.  
Press [Menu].  
– <Manual>: Does not answer any calls. You  
need to manually receive faxes.  
1
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
2
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
– For <FaxTel> or <Manual>, make sure an  
external telephone is connected to the  
machine.  
– For <AnsMode>, make sure an answering  
machine is connected to the machine.  
– For <DRPD>, subscription to a DRPD service is  
required. Contact your telephone company for  
availability.  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
6
Press  
or  
to select <RX MODE>,  
then press [OK].  
Setting the Current Date and Time  
FAX SETTINGS  
1.RX MODE  
You can set the current date and time. The current  
date and time settings are used as standard timer  
settings for functions that require them.  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
Press [Menu].  
receive mode, then press [OK].  
1
RX MODE  
Press  
or  
to select <TIMER  
FaxOnly  
2
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
– <FaxOnly>: Answers all calls as faxes.  
– <FaxTel>: Switches between fax and voice  
calls automatically. For optional settings, see  
MENU  
7.TIMER SETTINGS  
– <AnsMode>: Receives faxes automatically and  
records voice messages.  
Press  
or  
to select <DATE&TIME  
3
SETTING>, then press [OK].  
TIMER SETTINGS  
1.DATE&TIME SETTING  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
Press  
or  
to select <TEL LINE  
4
5
date (month/day/year) and time (in 24-  
hour/military time format), then press  
[OK].  
5
6
TYPE>, then press [OK].  
USER SETTINGS  
2.TEL LINE TYPE  
Ex.  
DATE&TIME SETTING  
12/31/'08 15:50  
Press  
or  
to select the telephone  
line type, then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
TEL LINE TYPE  
TOUCH TONE  
– <TOUCH TONE>: Tone dialing  
– <ROTARY PULSE>: Pulse dialing  
Setting the Type of Telephone Line  
– If you do not know the telephone line type,  
call your telephone service provider for  
details.  
Set the type of telephone line that is connected to  
the machine. If this setting is incorrect, you will be  
unable to communicate with other machines. Make  
sure to check the type of telephone line that you  
are using, and make the correct setting. The default  
setting is <TOUCH TONE>.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
Registering the Machines Name  
Press [Menu].  
1
Your name or company’s name must be registered  
as the machine’s name.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
When you send a document, the name that you  
registered is printed as the sender’s name on the  
recipient’s paper.  
2
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <USER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
2.USER SETTINGS  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction to Using Fax Functions  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
4
5
6
3
4
5
6
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1.TX SETTINGS  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <UNIT NAME>,  
Press  
or  
to select <USER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX SETTINGS  
1.UNIT NAME  
FAX SETTINGS  
2.USER SETTINGS  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
Press  
or  
to select <UNIT  
[Tone] to enter the unit name (up to 24  
characters), then press [OK]. (For  
information on how to enter characters,  
see “Information About the Keys,in the e-  
Manual.)  
TELEPHONE #>, then press [OK].  
USER SETTINGS  
1.UNIT TELEPHONE #  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] to enter  
Ex.  
your fax/telephone number (up to 20  
digits, including spaces), then press [OK].  
(For information on how to enter  
characters, see “Information About the  
Keys,in the e-Manual.)  
UNIT NAME  
CANON  
:a  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
Ex.  
UNIT TELEPHONE #  
12XXXXXXX  
Registering Your Machine’s Fax  
Number  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Your machine’s fax number must be registered.  
When you send a document, the number that you  
registered is printed on the recipient’s paper.  
7
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Fax Documents  
Sending Fax Documents  
This section describes the settings and procedures for sending fax documents.  
Basic Methods for Sending Faxes  
Press [Start].  
5
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press or to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 4.  
This section describes the flow of sending faxes.  
Place documents.  
1
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
Calling the Recipient before  
Sending Fax Documents (Manual  
Sending)  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
The SEND/FAX indicator lights up and the  
machine enters the send standby mode.  
Use manual sending when you want to talk to the  
recipient before sending a document, or if the  
recipient does not have a fax machine that can  
receive automatically.  
Press  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
– You cannot use the platen glass for manual sending.  
– You cannot use group addresses for manual sending.  
– You cannot use 2-Sided scanning mode for manual sending.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
4
[Tone] to specify the fax number.  
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
If you enter a wrong number when specifying a  
fax number, go back to the wrong digit with  
.
6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Fax Documents  
Connect an external telephone to the  
machine if you want to talk to the  
recipient before sending a document.  
Dial the recipient’s fax number.  
1
2
7
8
For information on how to connect an external  
telephone to the machine, seeMake Fax  
Settings,in the Starter Guide orConnect  
Telephone Cables,in the e-Manual.  
– Make sure to confirm the dial tone before  
entering a fax number. If you enter the number  
before the dial tone is heard, the call may not  
connect, or the wrong number may be dialed.  
– If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.>  
in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you  
Place documents in the ADF.  
specify a fax number using  
,
[numeric  
keys] and [Tone], you must enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter the same  
fax number you entered in step 7, then press  
[OK].  
Talk through the handset to the recipient.  
– If you press [Hook] in step 6, you can pick  
up the handset when you hear the recipient’s  
voice.  
– If you hear a high-pitched signal instead of  
the recipient’s voice, skip to step 10.  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
3
4
Ask the recipient to set their fax machine  
to receive faxes.  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
9
10  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
When you hear a high-pitched signal,  
press [Start], then hang up the  
handset.  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Scanning starts, and the scanned data is sent to  
the specified destination when scanning is  
complete.  
Adjust any necessary settings for your  
documents.  
5
6
For details, seeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29,  
Switching Temporarily to Tone  
Dialing  
Press [Hook] or pick up the handset of  
your external telephone.  
If your machine is set for pulse dialing, follow the  
procedure below to switch to tone dialing to use  
information services (e.g., banks, airline  
If you press [Hook], you can temporarily  
adjust the monitor tone volume with  
and  
reservations, and hotel reservations).  
. After adjusting the volume, press [OK].  
To talk to the other party, you will need to connect an external  
telephone to the machine.  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
1
6-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Fax Documents  
Dialing an Overseas Number (With  
Pauses)  
Press  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
2
3
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
When you dial or register an overseas number, you  
may need to insert a pause within the number.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Place documents.  
1
Press [Hook].  
Make sure to confirm the dial tone before  
entering a fax number. If you enter the number  
before the dial tone is heard, the call may not be  
connected, or the wrong number may be dialed.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to dial the  
4
5
required information service.  
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXX  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
When the recorded message of the  
information service answers, press  
[Tone] to switch to tone dialing.  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
Ex.  
S E L E C T : O K  
FAX NUMBER  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
TEL=012XXX*  
Adjust any necessary scan settings for  
your documents.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
4
5
6
7
numbers requested by the information  
service.  
For details, seeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29,  
Ex.  
Use  
[numeric keys] to dial the  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXX*3456#  
international access code.  
Ex.  
If you want to receive faxes, press  
[Start].  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012  
If you are using the external telephone, hang up  
the handset after pressing [Start].  
For details on international access codes,  
contact your local telephone company.  
6-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Fax Documents  
If necessary, press [Recall/Pause]/  
[Redial/Pause] to insert a pause.  
Press [Start].  
6
9
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
Ex.  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012P  
– The letter <P> is displayed between the  
numbers.  
– You can enter successive pauses within the  
number to make the pause time longer.  
Basic Methods for Sending PC  
Faxes  
This section describes the flow of sending PC faxes.  
Make sure that the fax driver is installed.  
For details on the fax driver settings, see “Fax,in the  
e-Manual.  
– You can change the length of a pause  
inserted within the fax number in the <PAUSE  
TIME> menu. (SeeAdjusting the Pause Time,”  
on p. 6-40.)  
Enter the country code, the area code,  
and the fax/telephone number of the  
recipient.  
7
8
– If an error occurs in the printer while sending a fax, send the  
document once more from the fax driver. The fax job sent  
from the fax driver for which an error occurred will be erased.  
– Up to 512 fax transmission recipients can be stored in the  
device. If the number of recipients exceeds 512 after a fax job  
has been sent to the device, the last job to be input will be  
erased. Be careful when registering more than 512 recipients  
in groups or when sending a fax continuously to multiple  
groups.  
– Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you  
are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided  
with the application software.  
– The display may differ according to the operating system and  
system environment.  
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012p345XXXXX  
Press [Recall/Pause]/[Redial/Pause] to  
enter a pause at the end of the number.  
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012p345XXXXXP  
Open the document you want to fax from  
the application.  
– The letter <P> appears at the end of the fax  
number.  
– Pauses entered at the end of fax numbers are  
always 10 seconds long.  
1
2
Select [Print] from the [File] menu.  
The [Print] dialog box is displayed.  
If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you  
The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box  
may differ depending on the application you are  
using.  
specify a fax number using  
,
[numeric  
keys] and [Tone], you must enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax  
number you entered in steps 5 to 8, then press  
[OK].  
6-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Fax Documents  
Select the fax icon ([Canon D1100 Series  
(FAX)]), then click [Print] or [OK].  
3
4
The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is  
displayed.  
If you want to adjust the fax properties, click  
[Preferences] or [Properties].  
Specify recipient name and fax number in  
the [Sending Settings] sheet, click [Add to  
Recipient List].  
– The number of recipients to which you can  
send simultaneously depends on the  
conditions of cover sheet attachment. For  
details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand  
corner of the fax driver window to view the  
online help.  
– You can select a recipient from the address  
book by clicking [Address Book]. (SeeFax,in  
the e-Manual.)  
– You can use or edit the address book only if you  
are permitted access to the folder where the  
address book file is saved (by default, Power  
Users and higher have access to the folder). If  
you are not permitted access to the folder, log  
on as a user who has access to the folder, or  
click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book]  
sheet, and save the address book file in a folder,  
such as the [My Documents] folder, where you  
have written permission. (SeeFax,in the e-  
Manual for changing where you save the  
address book.)  
If you want to attach a cover sheet, select  
[Cover Sheet] sheet, specify a format for  
the cover sheet.  
5
6
SeeFax,in the e-Manual for cover sheet  
attachment.  
Click [OK].  
Faxing starts.  
6-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling Sending Fax Documents  
Canceling Sending Fax Documents  
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in progress.  
You can also cancel a transmission from the Status Monitor screen. (SeeChecking/Deleting Fax Transmission Documents,on p. 6-  
Press [Stop/Reset].  
1
2
When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message  
appears, press [OK].  
When scanning using the ADF:  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
PRESS OK KEY  
When scanning using the platen glass:  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
When the <CANCEL?> message appears,  
3
press  
to select <YES>.  
CANCEL?  
< YES  
NO >  
For sending jobs, remove any unscanned  
documents from the ADF.  
6-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifying Destinations  
Specifying Destinations  
This section describes how to specify a fax destination. You can select a destination stored  
in the Address Book, a one-touch key or coded dial code, or you can specify a new  
destination.  
Using Numeric Keys  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and  
4
[Tone] to enter the fax number.  
You can specify a new fax number using  
[numeric keys] and [Tone].  
,
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
Place documents.  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
1
If you entered a wrong number when specifying  
a fax number, go back to the wrong digit with  
.
If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you  
specify a fax number using  
,
[numeric  
keys] and [Tone], you need to enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax  
number you entered in step 4, then press [OK].  
Press [Start].  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
5
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
2
3
or  
to select the document  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 4.  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
6-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifying Destinations  
Using the One-Touch Keys  
Press [Start].  
5
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
You can specify up to 20 destinations using one-  
touch keys.  
or  
to select the document  
– To use this feature, you need to first register destinations in  
one-touch Keys. (See“Storing/Editing One-Touch Keys,on  
– A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same  
time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 4.  
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
specified with  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you  
specify a group, which is made up of several destinations,  
each destination in the group is counted as a separate  
address.  
Place documents.  
1
When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
destination by any other method than using  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine  
starts scanning automatically without pressing  
[Start], after the preset time for this setting is  
elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on p. 6-41.)  
Using Coded Dial Codes  
You can specify up to 180 destinations using coded  
dial codes.  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
– To use this feature, you need to register destinations in coded  
dial code beforehand. (See“Storing/Editing Coded Dial Codes,”  
on p. 5-12.)  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same time.  
(Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be specified  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
with  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you specify a  
group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination in  
the group is counted as a separate address.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Press the desired one-touch key (01 to  
20).  
4
Ex.  
T E L = 1 2 3 X X X X X X X  
[ 0 1 ] J o h n  
If you pressed a wrong key, press  
[Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.  
6-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifying Destinations  
Place documents.  
Press [Start].  
1
6
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press or to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 5.  
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
destination by any other method than using  
F A X  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine  
S E L E C T : O K  
starts scanning automatically without pressing  
[Start], after the preset time for this setting is  
elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on p. 6-41.)  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Press [Coded Dial] .  
4
5
Using the Group Addresses  
INPUT CODED NUMBER  
[*  
]
Group Dialing enables you to specify a group of  
registered destinations in the one-touch keys or  
Use  
[numeric keys] and to enter  
coded dial codes. This is useful if you want to send  
the same document to several destinations. You can  
register up to 199 destinations in one group.  
the desired three-digit code (000 to 179).  
Ex.  
T E L = 1 2 3 X X X X X X X  
[ * 0 0 0 ] J o h n  
– To use this feature, you must store group addresses in the  
one-touch keys or coded dial codes beforehand. (See  
If you entered a wrong code, press  
[Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.  
– A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same  
time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be  
specified with  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you  
specify a group, which is made up of several destinations,  
each destination in the group is counted as a separate  
address.  
6-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifying Destinations  
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
Place documents.  
1
When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
destination by any other method than using  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine  
starts scanning automatically without pressing  
[Start], after the preset time for this setting is  
elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on p. 6-41.)  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
Using the Address Book Key  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
[Address Book] search enables you to search for a  
recipient registered in the machine. This is useful  
when you forget which one-touch key or coded dial  
code the recipient you want is registered under.  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
– To use this feature, you must register destinations in the one-  
touch keys or coded dial codes beforehand. (See“Storing/  
– A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same  
time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be  
Press the one-touch key or [Coded  
Dial] followed by the three-digit code  
under which the desired address group is  
registered.  
4
5
Ex.  
specified with  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you  
specify a group, which is made up of several destinations,  
each destination in the group is counted as a separate  
address.  
GROUP DIAL  
[03]Canon  
If you pressed a wrong key or code, press  
[Stop/Reset], then try again from step 3.  
Place documents.  
1
Press [Start].  
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 4.  
6-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifying Destinations  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
Press  
recipient.  
or  
to search for the  
2
3
6
Ex.  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
NAME SEARCH  
Canon  
:A  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
: Displays recipients in alphanumerical  
order.  
: Displays recipients in reverse order.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
When the desired recipient is displayed,  
press [OK].  
Press [Address Book] repeatedly to  
select <NAME SEARCH> or <ADD/TEL  
SEARCH>, then press [OK].  
7
8
4
Ex.  
NAME SEARCH  
Canon(sales)  
:A  
NAME SEARCH  
Press [Start].  
ADD/TEL SEARCH  
– When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press or to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to  
start sending.  
– You can also adjust the following scan  
settings as necessary, using the keys on the  
operation panel, after specifying the  
destination in step 7.  
– <NAME SEARCH>: Searches a destination by  
name.  
– <ADD/TEL SEARCH>: Searches a destination  
by fax number.  
– If no recipient is registered in the Address  
Book, <NOT REGISTERED> is displayed.  
• Density: SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-29.  
• Image Quality: SeeSelecting Image Quality,”  
on p. 6-30.  
• 2-Sided: See2-Sided Documents,on p. 6-  
Use  
and [numeric keys] to enter  
5
the first letter of the recipient’s name or  
the first part of the fax number.  
– For example, if you want to search for a name  
that starts with the letterC, press (ABC).  
Entries starting with the letter you entered are  
displayed if any entries are registered. You can  
switch the input mode by pressing [Tone].  
When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
• [:A]: Letter mode  
• [:1]: Number mode  
destination by any other method than using  
Ex.  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine  
NAME SEARCH  
C
:A  
starts scanning automatically without pressing  
[Start], after the preset time for this setting is  
elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on p. 6-41.)  
6-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying Destinations  
Ex.  
Sending Documents to More Than  
One Location (Broadcasting)  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
Broadcasting enables you to send the same  
document to multiple recipients.  
Use  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone],  
one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or  
[Address Book] to specify destinations.  
– A maximum of 201 destinations can be specified at the same  
time. (Out of the 200 destinations, a number or address can be  
specified with  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone].) If you  
– Only one destination can be specified using  
specify a group, which is made up of several destinations,  
each destination in the group is counted as a separate  
address.  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone]. Make  
sure to press [OK] after entering the recipient’s  
number.  
– If you frequently send documents to multiple destinations, it  
is recommended that you store those destinations as a group.  
– If <REST. MULTI DEST> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS> is set to <PROHIBIT>, you cannot send the  
documents to multiple recipients. (SeeRestricting  
Broadcasting,in the e-Manual.)  
– If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.>  
in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you  
specify a fax number using  
,
[numeric  
keys] and [Tone], you must enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter the same  
fax number you entered in step 4, then press  
[OK].  
Place documents.  
1
Repeat step 4 to enter all required  
recipients.  
5
6
– To check all the specified destinations, press  
or  
to scroll the display.  
– To cancel all the specified destinations, press  
[Stop/Reset].  
Press [Start].  
When you place the documents on the platen  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
2
3
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
destination by any other method than using  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the machine  
Specify the destination.  
starts scanning automatically without pressing  
[Start], after the preset time for this setting is  
elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on p. 6-41.)  
4
6-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Redialing When the Line Is Busy  
Redialing When the Line Is Busy  
If the recipients line is busy or if there is no answer, you can redial the same fax number  
manually or set the machine to redial automatically.  
Confirm that the desired recipient is  
displayed.  
Redialing Manually  
4
5
You can specify the last three destinations that were  
Ex.  
dialed using  
[Tone].  
,
[numeric keys] and  
T E L = 1 2 3 X X X X X X X  
– This feature is available for the D1150.  
Press [Start].  
– For directions on how to recall the last three destinations for  
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
– If <REST. REDIAL/CALL> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS> is set to <ON>,  
[Redial/Pause] is not available.  
(SeeRestricting Job Recall,in the e-Manual.)  
Place documents.  
1
Press  
[FAX].  
2
3
Press [Redial/Pause] repeatedly.  
6-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Redialing When the Line Is Busy  
Redialing Automatically  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
6
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Automatic redialing enables the machine to  
automatically redial the recipient’s fax number if the  
recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if  
a sending error occurs. Auto Redial can be turned  
<ON> or <OFF>. If you set <AUTO REDIAL> to  
<ON>, you can set how many times the machine  
redials the number, and the redial interval. The  
default settings are as follows:  
AUTO REDIAL  
ON  
If you select <OFF>, skip to step 13.  
Press  
or  
to select <REDIAL  
7
8
TIMES>, then press [OK].  
AUTO REDIAL  
1.REDIAL TIMES  
<AUTO REDIAL>: <ON>  
<REDIAL TIMES>: <2TIMES>  
<REDIAL INTERVAL>: <2MIN.>  
Use  
,
or  
[numeric keys] to  
<TX ERROR REDIAL>: <ON>  
enter the number of redials (1 to 10  
times) the machine will make, then press  
[OK].  
Press [Menu].  
1
REDIAL TIMES  
2TIMES  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
2
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Regardless of the number you entered, the  
machine makes only one redialing attempt if it  
does not detect a busy signal.  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <REDIAL  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
9
INTERVAL>, then press [OK].  
AUTO REDIAL  
2.REDIAL INTERVAL  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
FAX SETTINGS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
Use  
,
or  
[numeric keys] to  
10  
enter the time (2 to 99 minutes, in one-  
minute increments) between redials, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <AUTO  
REDIAL>, then press [OK].  
REDIAL INTERVAL  
2MIN.  
TX SETTINGS  
3.AUTO REDIAL  
6-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Redialing When the Line Is Busy  
Press  
or  
to select <TX ERROR  
11  
12  
REDIAL>, then press [OK].  
AUTO REDIAL  
3.TX ERROR REDIAL  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
TX ERROR REDIAL  
ON  
– <ON>: Resends all pages if an error occurs  
during transmission.  
– <OFF>: Does not redial even if an error occurs  
during transmission.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
13  
6-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Send History to Resend Faxes (Job Recall)  
Using the Send History to Resend Faxes (Job  
Recall)  
You can recall the last three destinations and send documents to one of them.  
– This feature is available for the D1180/D1170.  
– If <REST. REDIAL/CALL> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON>,  
(SeeRestricting Job Recall,in the e-Manual.)  
[Recall/Pause] is not available.  
Confirm that the desired recipient is  
displayed.  
Place documents.  
5
6
1
Ex.  
PRESS START TO SEND  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
Press [Start].  
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
Press  
[SEND/FAX].  
2
3
4
Press [Recall/Pause].  
Press  
or  
to select <1 BEFORE>,  
<2 BEFORE>, or <3 BEFORE>, then press  
[OK].  
RECALL  
1.BEFORE  
6-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting Density  
Adjusting Density  
You can adjust the density to the most appropriate level for the document you send.  
Place documents.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to adjust the density,  
1
6
DENSITY  
-LT  
DK+  
: to make light documents darker  
: to make documents lighter  
– This setting returns to the default after all  
documents are scanned. If you want to keep  
the setting, see“Standard Send Settings,on  
– You can preset the standard density level on a  
nine-step scale. (See“Changing Density Level,”  
on p. 6-34.)  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
Press [Start].  
7
When you place the documents on the platen  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Specify the destination.  
Ex.  
4
5
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
For details, see“Specifying Destinations,on p. 6-  
Press [Density].  
6-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selecting Image Quality  
Selecting Image Quality  
You can adjust the image quality of the document you send. The higher image quality you  
set, the better the output will be, but the longer the transmission will take. The default  
setting is <FINE>.  
Place documents.  
Press [Image Quality] repeatedly to  
select the image quality, then press [OK].  
1
5
F I N E  
– <FINE>: for fine-print documents (the  
resolution is twice that of <STANDARD>) (200  
× 200 dpi)  
– <PHOTO>: for documents that contain  
photographs (the resolution is twice that of  
<STANDARD>) (200 × 200 dpi)  
– <SUPER FINE>: for documents that contain  
fine print and images (the resolution is four  
times that of <STANDARD>) (200 × 400 dpi)  
– <ULTRA FINE>: for documents that contain  
fine print and images (the resolution is eight  
times that of <STANDARD>). (400 × 400 dpi)  
– <STANDARD>: for most text-only documents  
(200 × 100 dpi)  
– This setting returns to the default after all  
documents are scanned. If you want to keep  
the setting, see“Standard Send Settings,on  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Specify the destination.  
Ex.  
Press [Start].  
6
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
4
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
For details, see“Specifying Destinations,on p. 6-  
6-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2-Sided Documents  
2-Sided Documents  
You can set the machine to automatically turn over 2-sided documents that are placed in the  
ADF, and scan each side separately.  
Place documents in the ADF.  
Press [2-Sided] repeatedly to select the  
binding type, then press [OK].  
1
5
2-SIDED  
BOOK TYPE  
– <BOOK TYPE>: The front and back sides of the  
document have the same top-bottom  
orientation.  
– <CALENDAR TYPE>: The front and back sides  
of the document have opposite top-bottom  
orientations.  
– <OFF>: The machine does not automatically  
scan both sides of the document.  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
2
3
Press [Start].  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
6
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
Specify the destination.  
Ex.  
4
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
For details, see“Specifying Destinations,on p. 6-  
6-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)  
Sending Documents at a Preset Time  
(Delayed Sending)  
Delayed sending enables you to start transmission at a specified time. You can store up to  
70 delayed sending jobs. The default setting is <OFF>.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press [Menu].  
6
7
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
Place documents.  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <DELAYED  
3
4
5
SEND>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
1.DELAYED SEND  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
Press  
Press  
[SEND/FAX]/  
[FAX].  
8
9
DELAYED SEND  
ON  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <FAX>, then press [OK].  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
time you want to start sending, then  
press [OK].  
F A X  
S E L E C T : O K  
Ex.  
For the D1150, skip this step.  
TX TIME SETTING  
20:00  
– Enter the time in 24-hour/military time format.  
– Enter all numbers, including zeros.  
6-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Documents at a Preset Time (Delayed Sending)  
Specify the destination.  
10  
11  
Ex.  
FAX NUMBER  
TEL=012XXXXXXX  
For details, see“Specifying Destinations,on p. 6-  
If <CONFIRM FAX NO.> in <ACCESS TO DEST.> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set to <ON> and you  
specify a fax number using  
keys] and [Tone], you must enter the fax  
number again for confirmation. Enter the same fax  
number you entered in step 10, then press [OK].  
,
[numeric  
Press [Start].  
The document is scanned and stored into  
memory. It will be sent to the specified  
destination at the specified time.  
When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
– When <TIME OUT> is set to <ON> in <TX  
SETTINGS> in <FAX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, and if you have specified the  
destination by any other method than using  
,
[numeric keys] and [Tone], the  
machine starts scanning automatically without  
pressing [Start], after the preset time for this  
setting is elapsed. (SeeTime Out Mode,on  
– If the document cannot be sent at the time  
specified for delayed sending due to a  
temporary power failure (that recovers within  
an hour), it will be sent at the specified time on  
the next day.  
6-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Density Level  
Changing Density Level  
This setting enables you to preset the standard density level on a nine-step scale. The  
default setting is <5> on a scale of 1 to 9. The level you define here applies when you select  
the “standard” level (in the middle of the scale) using  
[Density] on the operation panel.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to adjust the density,  
1
2
6
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
SCANNING DENSITY  
-LT  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
DK+  
MENU  
: to make light documents darker  
: to make documents lighter  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
7
3
4
5
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1.TX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <SCANNING  
DENSITY>, then press [OK].  
TX SETTINGS  
4.SCANNING DENSITY  
6-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Standard Send Settings  
Standard Send Settings  
This mode enables you to specify the standard scan settings for density and resolution.  
Storing the Standard Send Settings  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
6
setting item, then press [OK].  
You can change and store the Standard Send  
Settings. The default settings are as follows:  
<DENSITY>: <STANDARD>  
STANDARD SETTINGS  
1.DENSITY  
<RESOLUTION>: <200 × 200 dpi>  
You can specify the following settings:  
– <DENSITY>: Adjusts the density of  
documents. (SeeAdjusting Density,on p. 6-  
– <RESOLUTION>: Adjusts the image quality of  
documents. (See“Selecting Image Quality,on  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2
3
4
5
MENU  
Each time you set the desired setting  
item, press [OK].  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
7
8
DENSITY  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
STANDARD  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
Restoring the Standard Send  
Settings to Their Default  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1.TX SETTINGS  
You can restore the Standard Send Settings to their  
original default settings.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <STANDARD  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
1
TX SETTINGS  
5.STANDARD SETTINGS  
6-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Standard Send Settings  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
2
3
4
5
6
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1.TX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <INIT  
STANDARD SET>, then press [OK].  
TX SETTINGS  
10.INIT STANDARD SET  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
OK TO INITIALIZE?  
< YES  
NO >  
To cancel restoring the Standard Send Settings,  
press  
to select <NO>.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
6-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing the TX Terminal ID  
Printing the TX Terminal ID  
The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify the details included in the Terminal ID  
information printed on faxed documents. Information such as your fax number and name  
can be included to let the recipient know who sent the document. You can set the position of  
the Terminal ID information on the paper. The default settings are as follows:  
– <PRINTING POSITION>: <OUTSIDE IMAGE>  
– <TELEPHONE # MARK>: <FAX>  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <PRINTING  
1
2
6
7
POSITION>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TX TERMINAL ID  
1.PRINTING POSITION  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
or  
to select <INSIDE  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
IMAGE> or <OUTSIDE IMAGE>, then press  
[OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
4
5
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
PRINTING POSITION  
OUTSIDE IMAGE  
TX/RX SETTINGS.  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
– <INSIDE IMAGE>: The Terminal ID information  
is printed inside the image area on the  
recipient’s paper.  
– <OUTSIDE IMAGE>: The Terminal ID  
information is printed outside the image area  
on the recipient’s paper.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1.TX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TELEPHONE #  
8
MARK>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX TERMINAL  
TX TERMINAL ID  
2.TELEPHONE # MARK  
ID>, then press [OK].  
TX SETTINGS  
7.TX TERMINAL ID  
6-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing the TX Terminal ID  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX> or  
9
<TEL>, then press [OK].  
TELEPHONE # MARK  
FAX  
– <TEL>:TELis printed before the fax/  
telephone number.  
– <FAX>:FAXis printed before the fax/  
telephone number.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
10  
6-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ECM Transmission  
ECM Transmission  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that  
occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other  
machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be  
extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM off. The  
default setting is <ON>.  
– If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Transmission be set in both the destination machine and this  
machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.  
– Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.  
– If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ECM TX>, then  
1
2
5
6
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TX SETTINGS  
1.ECM TX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
then press [OK].  
,
to select <ON> or <OFF>,  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
ECM TX  
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
– <OFF>: The ECM transmission is not activated.  
– <ON>: The ECM transmission is activated.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
7
then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
6-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Pause Time  
Adjusting the Pause Time  
Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections  
when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destinations telephone  
number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When  
the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number.  
This helps to improve the connection. The default setting is two seconds.  
– You can insert a pause when you dial the fax number using  
– Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <PAUSE TIME>,  
1
2
5
6
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TX SETTINGS  
2.PAUSE TIME  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Use  
,
, or  
[numeric keys] to  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
set the pause time, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
PAUSE TIME  
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
2SEC  
The pause time can be set from 1 to 15 seconds  
in one second increments.  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
Press  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
6-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Time Out Mode  
Time Out Mode  
The Time Out mode enables you to set the machine to automatically start scanning  
documents after you specify the destinations using the one-touch keys or coded dial codes,  
or by pressing  
[Recall/Pause]/[Redial/Pause], without pressing [Start]. If you set the  
Time Out mode to <ON>, the machine pauses for five seconds after you specify a  
destination before starting to scan.  
If you are using sequential broadcasting to send your document to more than one location,  
you must dial the second fax number within five seconds of dialing the first fax number. All  
subsequent numbers must be dialed within 10 seconds. If you wait longer than the specified  
time out interval before dialing the next number, the machine starts to scan your  
document. The default setting is <OFF>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <TIME OUT>,  
1
2
5
6
7
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TX SETTINGS  
4.TIME OUT  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
TIME OUT  
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
6-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending  
Checking the Dial Tone before Sending  
The following redirection problem may happen with certain kinds of fax machines on the  
market made by companies other than Canon. The DIALING LINE CHCK mode prevents this  
rare occurrence from happening. If you are sending a fax document from your machine at  
the same time another fax machine (made by a company other than Canon) is trying to send  
you a fax, your fax document may end up being redirected to that fax machine, instead of  
the original destination you had intended. Setting <DIALING LINE CHCK> to <ON> enables  
you to avoid such sending problems. The default setting is <OFF>.  
The DIALING LINE CHCK mode is enabled only after you turn OFF the main power and turn it back ON again. For more information  
on how to turn the main power ON and OFF, seeConnect Power Cord and Turn on the Machine,in the Starter Guide.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <DIALING LINE  
1
2
5
6
7
CHCK>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TX SETTINGS  
5.DIALING LINE CHCK  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
DIALING LINE CHCK  
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <TX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
6-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Send Start Speed  
Send Start Speed  
This function enables you to change the send start speeds, which is useful when there is  
difficulty initiating the sending of a document. The default setting is <33600bps>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select the desired start  
1
2
6
7
speed, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <SYSTEM  
TX START SPEED  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
33600bps  
If your document transmission is slow in  
starting, this may mean that the telephone lines  
in your area are in poor condition. Select a  
slower speed. You can select <33600bps>,  
<14400bps>, <9600bps>, <7200bps>,  
<4800bps>, or <2400bps>.  
MENU  
10.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
If the System Manager ID and System Password  
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and  
System Password using  
[numeric keys],  
then press [Log In/Out].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select  
3
4
5
<COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
6.COMMUNICATIONS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
COMMUNICATIONS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TX START  
SPEED>, then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
1.TX START SPEED  
6-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Fax Documents  
Receiving Fax Documents  
This section describes how the machine operates when it receives fax documents.  
The D1180/D1170 can receive I-fax documents.  
Basic Methods for Receiving Faxes  
– The Processing/Data indicator blinks or  
When documents are being received, the  
maintains a steady green light even when the  
1
Processing/Data indicator on the  
machine enters the Sleep mode.  
operation panel blinks a green light.  
– The Error indicator blinks a red light when either  
the amount of available memory is low or  
paper needs to be loaded into a paper cassette.  
The document is printed.  
3
The Processing/Data indicator goes out when  
documents stored in memory are printed.  
– When a paper size other than <LTR>, <LGL>,  
<A4>, <B5>, or <A5> is set, the machine may  
perform printing even if a different size paper is  
loaded in the paper cassette or the multi-  
purpose tray. In this case, the images may be  
printed only partially or incorrectly. Make sure  
the paper size setting matches the size of the  
paper that is actually loaded.  
When document reception is complete,  
the Processing/Data indicator on the  
operation panel maintains a steady green  
light. This indicates that documents are  
stored in memory.  
2
– If there is no paper on which the received  
document can be printed, the received  
document is stored in memory.  
– Documents which have been stored in memory  
because the paper has run out, are  
automatically printed when paper is loaded  
into a paper cassette.  
– If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator  
blinks a red light.  
6-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides of Paper  
Printing Received Documents on Both Sides  
of Paper  
You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to  
save paper. The default setting is <OFF>.  
– Make sure to close the sub-output tray before performing 2-sided printing.  
– Do not open the sub-output tray while performing 2-sided printing.  
– When performing 2-sided printing, make sure to confirm that the paper size switch lever on the rear side of the machine  
is set to the appropriate position. Paper jams may occur if the lever is not set appropriately. For details on how to set the  
paper size switch lever, see“Setting the Paper Size Switch Lever,on p. 2-16.  
– Only LTR, A4, and LGL size paper can be used for 2-sided printing.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
1
2
6
7
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
TWO-SIDED PRINT  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
MENU  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
4
5
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
2.RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TWO-SIDED  
PRINT>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
1.TWO-SIDED PRINT  
6-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Reducing a Received Document  
Reducing a Received Document  
You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole  
document is printed within the printable area of the paper. The default setting is <ON>  
(<AUTO> and <VERTICAL ONLY>).  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
1
2
6
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
RECEIVE REDUCTION  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
If you select <OFF>, skip to step 12.  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <RX  
7
8
REDUCTION>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
4
5
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
RECEIVE REDUCTION  
1.RX REDUCTION  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press  
or  
to select <AUTO> or  
<FIXED REDUCTION>, then press [OK].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
RX REDUCTION  
FIXED REDUCTION  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
2.RX SETTINGS  
– If you select <AUTO>, the image is reduced  
automatically. Skip to step 10.  
– If you select <FIXED REDUCTION>, go to the  
next step.  
Press  
or  
to select <RECEIVE  
REDUCTION>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select a preset  
9
reduction ratio (90%, 95%, 97%, or 75%),  
then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
2.RECEIVE REDUCTION  
SELECT REDUCE %  
90%  
6-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Reducing a Received Document  
Press  
or  
to select <REDUCE  
10  
11  
DIRECTION>, then press [OK].  
RECEIVE REDUCTION  
2.REDUCE REDUCTION  
Press  
or  
to select <VERTICAL  
ONLY> or <HORIZ & VERTICAL>, then  
press [OK].  
REDUCE REDUCTION  
VERTICAL ONLY  
– <VERTICAL ONLY>: Reduces the document  
vertically only.  
– <HORIZ & VERTICAL>: Reduces the document  
both horizontally and vertically.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
12  
6-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Footer Information on a Received Document  
Printing Footer Information on a Received  
Document  
You can set whether to insert the machines fax number and the sender information on  
received faxes. The default setting is <OFF>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <OFF> or  
1
2
6
7
<ON>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
RX PAGE FOOTER  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
MENU  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
4
5
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
2.RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <RX PAGE  
FOOTER>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
3.RX PAGE FOOTER  
6-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner Runs Out  
Specifying the Way of Printing When Toner  
Runs Out  
You can set if the machine stores all documents in memory or continue printing without  
storing documents in memory, when the toner runs out. The default setting is <RX TO  
MEMORY>.  
– When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <KEEP PRINTING>, you  
can continue printing. The printed documents may be light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when  
the documents are printed out, so you cannot print the same documents again.  
– When the <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> message appears, if you set <CONT. PRINTING> to <RX TO MEMORY>, the  
machine stores all documents in memory. After the toner cartridge is replaced, the documents can be printed and the  
setting can be reset.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <CONT.  
1
2
5
6
PRINTING>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
RX SETTINGS  
4.CONT. PRINTING  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
or  
to select <RX TO  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
MEMORY> or <KEEP PRINTING>, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
3
4
COMMON SET.>, then press [OK].  
CONT. PRINTING  
RX TO MEMORY  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
2.TX/RX COMMON SET.  
– <RX TO MEMORY>: The machine stores all  
documents in memory.  
– <KEEP PRINTING>: You can continue printing.  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
7
TX/RX COMMON SET.  
2.RX SETTINGS  
6-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ECM Reception  
ECM Reception  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that  
occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other  
machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If reception speed appears to be  
extremely slow, you may be able to speed up reception time by turning ECM off. The default  
setting is <ON>.  
– If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Reception be set in both the sending and receiving  
machines. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.  
– Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.  
– If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ECM RX>, then  
Press [Menu].  
5
6
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
RX SETTINGS  
1.ECM RX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
ECM RX  
ON  
3
4
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
– <OFF>: The ECM reception is not activated.  
– <ON>: The ECM reception is activated.  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
7
then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
6-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optional Settings for FaxTel Mode  
Optional Settings for FaxTel Mode  
If you select <FaxTel> for the receive mode, you can specify the length of the detection time,  
ring time, and machines action after the ringing ends. The default settings are as follows:  
– <RING START TIME>: <6 SEC>  
– <F/T RING TIME>: <15 SEC>  
– <F/T SWITCH ACTION>: <RECEIVE>  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
or  
to select <RING START  
1
2
6
7
TIME>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
1.RING START TIME  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
MENU  
Use  
,
, or  
[numeric keys] to  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
specify the duration (4 to 30 seconds) for  
which the machine attempts to detect  
the fax tone before it starts ringing, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
RING START TIME  
6SEC  
If the machine receives a fax, the machine does  
not ring and switches to the receive mode  
automatically.  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <F/T RING  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
8
TIME>, then press [OK].  
FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
2.F/T RING TIME  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX/TEL OPT.  
SET>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
2.FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
6-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optional Settings for FaxTel Mode  
Use  
,
, or  
[numeric keys] to  
9
specify the duration (15 to 300 seconds)  
of ringing, then press [OK].  
F/T RING TIME  
15SEC  
Press  
or  
to select <F/T SWITCH  
10  
11  
ACTION>, then press [OK].  
FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
3.F/T SWITCH ACTION  
Press  
or  
to select the action the  
machine will take after the ringing ends,  
then press [OK].  
F/T SWITCH ACTION  
RECEIVE  
– <RECEIVE>: Receives a fax.  
– <DISCONNECT>: Disconnects the call.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
12  
6-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Settings for DRPD Mode  
Optional Settings for DRPD Mode  
If you select <DRPD> for the receive mode, you can select the ring pattern assigned by your  
telephone company. The default setting is <DOUBLE RING>.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select a ring pattern,  
Press [Menu].  
6
7
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
DRPD:SELECT FAX  
DOUBLE RING  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
You can select from the following ring patterns:  
<DOUBLE RING>, <SHORT-SHORT-LONG>,  
<SHORT-LONG-SHORT>, <OTHER RING TYPE>,  
or <NORMAL RING>  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <DRPD:SELECT  
FAX>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
3.DRPD:SELECT FAX  
6-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting the Incoming Ring  
Setting the Incoming Ring  
This function enables you to activate the ring alert of the external telephone if <RX MODE>  
is set to <FaxOnly> or <FaxTel>. Selecting <ON> enables you to distinguish between the fax  
reception and answer voice calls when you pick up the external telephone while it is ringing.  
The default setting is <ON>.  
Press [Menu].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <OFF> or <ON>  
1
2
6
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
INCOMING RING  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
ON  
– <OFF>: Incoming tone does not ring. If you  
select <OFF>, skip to step 8.  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
– <ON>: Incoming tone rings. If you select  
<ON>, go to the next step.  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to set the number of ring  
7
8
times (1 to 99 times), then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
RING COUNT  
2TIMES  
Press  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
then press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <INCOMING  
RING>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
4.INCOMING RING  
6-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX)  
Receiving Documents Manually with an  
External Telephone (Remote RX)  
You can connect one external telephone to the machine. When the telephone rings with the  
machine in the Manual receive mode, you can use the external telephone to start receiving  
the document without walking over to the machine. The default settings are as follows:  
– <REMOTE RX>: <ON>  
– <REMOTE RX ID>: <25>  
Activating the Remote Reception  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
4
5
6
Follow this procedure to turn on the remote  
reception.  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
If <MANUAL/AUTO> is set to <ON>, the machine switches to  
the document receive mode after the external telephone rings  
for a specified time. (SeeAdjusting the Auto Switch Time,on  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <REMOTE RX>,  
RX SETTINGS  
5.REMOTE RX  
Press [Menu].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
2
MENU  
REMOTE RX  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
ON  
If you do not want to change the default remote  
reception ID, skip to step 9.  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
3
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press [Clear] to delete the default  
remote reception ID of 25.  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
7
REMOTE RX ID  
25  
6-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents Manually with an External Telephone (Remote RX)  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter a new  
8
remote reception ID (a combination of  
two characters), then press [OK].  
Ex.  
REMOTE RX ID  
00  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
9
Receiving Documents with the  
Remote Reception  
Follow this procedure to receive fax documents  
using the remote reception.  
Before using the remote reception to receive fax documents,  
make sure the followings:  
– An external telephone is connected properly.  
– Your telephone is set to tone dialing.  
When you receive a call, pick up the  
external telephone.  
1
2
When you hear a beep, use  
[numeric keys] to enter the two-digit  
remote reception ID to start reception.  
If you hear someone on the line, you can start  
talking to the other party.  
When the reception is complete, hang up  
the telephone.  
3
6-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time  
Adjusting the Auto Switch Time  
This function enables you to set the machine to switch to document receive mode after  
ringing for a specified length of time in the Manual mode. The default setting is <OFF>.  
This function is only available when the <RX MODE> is set to <Manual>.  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
Press [Menu].  
6
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
1
2
MANUAL/AUTO  
Press  
or  
to select <TX/RX  
ON  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
– <OFF>: The external telephone keeps ringing  
until someone answers the call manually. If  
you select <OFF>, skip to step 8.  
MENU  
4.TX/RX SETTINGS  
– <ON>: The machine switches to the  
document receive mode after the external  
telephone rings for a specified time. If you  
select <ON>, go to the next step.  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
3
4
5
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
TX/RX SETTINGS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Use  
,
, or  
[numeric keys] to  
7
8
enter the length of time (1 to 99 seconds)  
that elapses before the machine switches  
to document receiving, then press [OK].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <RX SETTINGS>,  
F/T RING TIME  
15SEC  
FAX SETTINGS  
4.RX SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select <MANUAL/  
AUTO>, then press [OK].  
RX SETTINGS  
6.MANUAL/AUTO  
6-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receive Start Speed  
Receive Start Speed  
This function enables you to change the receive start speeds, which is useful when there is  
difficulty initiating the receiving of a document. The default setting is <33600bps>.  
Press  
or  
to select the desired  
Press [Menu].  
6
7
receive speed, then press [OK].  
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <SYSTEM  
RX START SPEED  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
33600bps  
If your document reception is slow in starting,  
this may mean that the telephone lines in your  
area are in poor condition. Select a slower  
speed. You can select <33600bps>,  
<14400bps>, <9600bps>, <7200bps>,  
<4800bps>, or <2400bps>.  
MENU  
10.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
If the System Manager ID and System Password  
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and  
System Password using  
[numeric keys],  
then press [Log In/Out].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press  
or  
to select  
3
4
5
<COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
6.COMMUNICATIONS  
Press  
or  
to select <FAX  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
COMMUNICATIONS  
3.FAX SETTINGS  
Press  
or  
to select <RX START  
SPEED>, then press [OK].  
FAX SETTINGS  
2.RX START SPEED  
6-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)  
Receiving Documents in Memory without  
Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)  
Normally a document prints as soon as you receive it. However, there may be occasions  
when you want the machine to store all documents in memory until you are ready to print  
them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called memory  
lock reception. The default setting is <OFF>.  
Press [Menu].  
1
When you select <OFF>, the machine starts to  
print the received documents in memory.  
Press  
or  
to select <SYSTEM  
2
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <PASSWORD>,  
MENU  
6
7
10.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
MEMORY LOCK  
1.PASSWORD  
If the System Manager ID and System Password  
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and  
System Password using  
[numeric keys],  
then press [Log In/Out].  
If you want to set or change a password  
for the Memory Lock mode, use  
[numeric keys] to enter the memory  
reception password (up to seven digits),  
then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select  
3
4
<COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
6.COMMUNICATIONS  
Ex.  
P A S S W O R D  
1 2  
Press  
or  
to select <MEMORY  
LOCK>, then press [OK].  
– If you set a password, it will be necessary to  
enter the password whenever you want to  
change the Memory Lock mode settings, or  
cancel the Memory Lock mode.  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4.MEMORY LOCK  
If the memory lock password has been set, enter  
– If you do not want to set the Memory Lock  
with a password, press [OK] without entering  
any numbers.  
the password using  
press [OK].  
[numeric keys], then  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
5
MEMORY LOCK  
ON  
6-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Receiving Documents in Memory without Printing Out (Memory Lock Reception)  
Press  
or  
to select <REPORT  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
8
9
PRINT>, then press [OK].  
13  
start time (in 24-hour/military time  
format), then press [OK].  
MEMORY LOCK  
2.REPORT PRINT  
Ex.  
MEM RX START TIME  
20:00  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or  
<OFF>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <MEM. RX END  
14  
15  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
REPORT PRINT  
ON  
MEMORY RX TIME  
– <OFF>: Does not print a RX report.  
– <ON>: Prints a RX report.  
2.MEM. RX END TIME  
Use  
[numeric keys] to enter the  
end time (in 24-hour/military time  
format), then press [OK].  
<RX REPORT> should also be set to <OUTPUT  
YES> so that RX reports are automatically printed  
when documents are received in memory. For  
instructions, seeRX Report,in the e-Manual.  
Ex.  
MEM. RX END TIME  
08:00  
Press  
or  
to select <MEMORY RX  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
10  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
16  
MEMORY LOCK  
3.MEMORY RX TIME  
If you do not need to set the timer for memory  
lock, skip to step 16.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <ON>, then  
11  
12  
MEMORY RX TIME  
ON  
Press  
or  
to select <MEM RX START  
TIME>, then press [OK].  
MEMORY RX TIME  
1.MEM RX START TIME  
6-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing All Documents Stored in the Memory Lock Reception Mode  
Printing All Documents Stored in the  
Memory Lock Reception Mode  
Follow this procedure to print documents received when the machine is in the memory lock  
reception mode.  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <OFF>, then  
Press [Menu].  
5
6
1
2
Press  
or  
to select <SYSTEM  
MEMORY LOCK  
SETTINGS>, then press [OK].  
OFF  
The received documents are printed.  
MENU  
10.SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
If the System Manager ID and System Password  
have been set, enter the System Manager ID and  
System Password using  
[numeric keys],  
then press [Log In/Out].  
Press  
or  
to select  
3
4
<COMMUNICATIONS>, then press [OK].  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
6.COMMUNICATIONS  
Press  
or  
to select <MEMORY  
LOCK>, then press [OK].  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4.MEMORY LOCK  
If the memory lock password has been set, enter  
the password using  
press [OK].  
[numeric keys], then  
6-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory  
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax  
Documents in Memory  
The Status Monitor screen enables you to view and change the status of fax documents in  
memory.  
Checking/Deleting Fax  
Transmission Documents  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <CANCEL>,  
4
5
0002  
CANCEL  
You can check the detailed information of fax  
documents currently being sent or waiting to be  
sent, then delete unwanted documents as  
necessary.  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS> or  
<JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].  
CANCEL?  
< YES  
1
2
3
NO >  
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
select <NO>.  
to  
TX/RX STATUS  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
6
If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press  
select <TX/RX>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
Checking/Deleting Fax Reception  
Documents  
Press  
list.  
or  
to scroll through the job  
You can delete the received documents in memory.  
You can also forward received documents in  
memory to a desired destination.  
0001 15:50 TX TRM...  
012XXXXXXX  
If you want to delete a job, go to the next step.  
Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <TX/RX STATUS> or  
<JOB CANCEL>, then press [OK].  
1
Press  
or  
to select the job you  
want to delete, then press [OK].  
TX/RX STATUS  
0002 15:51 TX STNDBY  
123XXXXXXX  
If you select <JOB CANCEL>, press  
select <TX/RX>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, skip to  
step 5.  
6-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Checking/Changing the Status of Fax Documents in Memory  
Press  
list.  
or  
to scroll through the job  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
2
6
5003 15:55 RX TRM...  
012XXXXXXX  
For the D1180/D1170, you can check for the  
arrival of I-faxes at any time if you select <I-FAX>  
in step 1. To be able to check the arrival of I-fax  
If you want to delete a job, go to the next step.  
Otherwise, press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
using  
[Job Cancel/Status Monitor], you must  
first set <POP> (Post Office Protocol) to <ON> in  
<E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS>.  
Press  
or  
to select the job you  
3
4
want to delete, then press [OK].  
5001 15:53 RX STNDBY  
123XXXXXXX  
Checking the Fax Log  
If you select <JOB CANCEL> in step 1, skip to  
step 5.  
You can view the results of fax transactions that list  
all faxes sent or received.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <CANCEL>,  
If you set <CHECKING THE LOG> to <OFF> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>, the job log does not appear in the display.  
5 0 0 1  
C A N C E L  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
1
repeatedly to select <TX/RX LOG>, then  
press [OK].  
TX/RX LOG  
You can forward the selected job to another  
destination by selecting <FORWARD>. For  
information on forwarding received documents,  
seeSending Documents in Memory to a Different  
Destination,in the e-Manual.  
Press  
or  
to view the required  
2
3
transmission/reception result.  
0001  
15:50 TX  
OK  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
012XXXXXXX  
5
CANCEL?  
< YES  
NO >  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
If you do not want to cancel the job, press  
select <NO>.  
to  
You can also check the results of fax transactions  
(transmission or reception) by printing the TX  
report, RX report, or Activity report. For details, see  
“Printing Reports Automatically,in the e-Manual  
andPrinting Reports and Lists Manually,in the e-  
Manual.  
6-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-Mail  
(D1180/D1170)  
7
This chapter describes the things that you must do before using e-mail functions. It also describes the settings and  
procedures for sending e-mails. E-mail functions are available only for the D1180/D1170.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of E-Mail Functions  
Overview of E-Mail Functions  
You can send scanned documents as e-mail attachments.  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of E-Mail Functions  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions  
Introduction to Using E-Mail Functions  
This machine enables you to send scanned documents to an e-mail application. Scanned  
documents are converted to file formats such as TIFF and are transmitted as an e-mail  
attachment to the recipients e-mail application.  
The necessary settings for using the e-mail function are shown below.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic E-Mail Operations  
Basic E-Mail Operations  
This section describes the basic procedures for sending e-mails and canceling a  
transmission in progress.  
Sending E-Mail Documents  
If you want to send color images attached to an  
e-mail message, select <E-MAIL:COLOR> as the  
sending method.  
This section describes the flow of sending e-mails.  
If <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> is set to <ON>, you cannot specify fax  
numbers using  
-
,
[numeric keys], and [Tone]. Make  
sure that <RESTRICT NEW ADD.> is set to <OFF>. (See  
“Restricting the New Addressin the e-Manual.)  
Specify the destination.  
4
Ex.  
Place documents.  
ADDRESS  
:a  
1
For details, seeSpecifying Destinations (E-Mail),”  
in the e-Manual.  
If you want to start sending without adjusting  
the optional send settings, skip to step 10.  
Press [OK] repeatedly until <FILE  
FORMAT> is displayed.  
5
6
Press  
or  
to select the file format,  
then press [OK].  
FILE FORMAT  
PDF  
Press  
[SEND/FAX].  
2
3
The SEND/FAX indicator lights up and the  
machine enters the send standby mode.  
– E-mail (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF(B&W)>  
– E-mail (Color): <PDF(COMPACT)>, <JPEG>  
Press  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:  
COLOR>, then press [OK].  
If you specify an e-mail address from Address  
Book without selecting the sending method,  
settings specified in <STANDARD SETTINGS> in  
<TX SETTINGS> in <TX/RX COMMON SET.> in  
<TX/RX SETTINGS> are displayed.  
E - M A I L : B & W  
S E L E C T : O K  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic E-Mail Operations  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or <OFF>  
Press  
or  
to select the original  
7
for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press  
[OK].  
9
type, then press [OK].  
ORIGINAL TYPE  
TEXT/PHOTO  
DIVIDE INTO PAGES  
ON  
– <TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain  
text and photos.  
– <TEXT>: For text documents.  
– <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file  
without dividing them.  
– <ON>: Separates multiple images and send  
them as separate files.  
– <PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine  
text or photos.  
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting  
is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is  
automatically set to <ON> when sending  
documents in JPEG format.  
If you have selected <PDF(COMPACT)> as the file  
format in step 6, the original type is automatically  
set to <TEXT/PHOTO>.  
Press [Start].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the resolution,  
10  
When you place the documents on the platen  
8
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
RESOLUTION  
200 200dpi  
– E-mail (B&W): <200×200dpi>, <300×300dpi>,  
<400×400dpi>, <600×600dpi>,  
<150×150dpi>, <200×100dpi>  
– E-mail (Color): <200×200dpi>, <300×300dpi>,  
<100×100dpi>, <150×150dpi>  
– You can also adjust the following scan settings  
as necessary.  
Density: SeeAdjusting Density (E-Mail),in  
the e-Manual.  
2-sided: See2-Sided Documents (E-Mail),in  
the e-Manual.  
– You can set the document’s name, a subject  
line, message body text, reply-to address, and e-  
mail priority common to all sending jobs. For  
instructions, seeOptional Settings for an E-Mail,”  
in the e-Manual.  
If <PDF(COMPACT)> is selected as the file format,  
only <300×300dpi> can be selected for sending  
color images attached to an e-mail message.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic E-Mail Operations  
Canceling Sending E-Mail  
Documents  
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in  
progress.  
You can also cancel a transmission from the Status Monitor  
screen. (SeeChecking/Deleting E-Mail Transmission  
Documents,in the e-Manual.)  
Press [Stop/Reset].  
1
When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message  
2
appears, press [OK].  
When scanning using the ADF:  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
PRESS OK KEY  
When scanning using the platen glass:  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
For sending jobs, remove any unscanned  
documents from the ADF.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview of the Scanner Functions  
Overview of the Scanner Functions  
You can retrieve documents scanned with this machine to your computer connected with a  
USB cable. You can also store the scanned documents to a file server.  
* The function of scanning documents to a file server is available only for the D1180/D1170.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of the Scanner Functions  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions  
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions  
This section describes what you must do before using the scanner functions.  
Make sure to set the following items first:  
Scanning Documents to a Computer  
The necessary settings for sending scanned documents to a file server are shown below.  
Basic Network Settings  
Connecting a Network Cable  
Connect the machine to the network environment.  
Setting the IP Address  
Make sure that the correct IP address is set.  
Scan to File Server Settings  
Conꢀrming Necessary Information  
Check the computer name and necessary components for ꢀle sharing.  
Setting up a File Server  
Set up a shared folder in which to store documents.  
Setting up the Machine*  
Set up the machine to use the Scan to File Server function.  
Specifying Destinations  
Register addresses, user names, and passwords in the one-touch keys or coded dial codes.  
Basic Method for Scanning Documents to a File Server  
Sending Documents to the File Server  
Try to send scanned documents to the shared folder.  
* You can set up the Scan to File Server function easily by using the Send Function Setting Tool. (See “Use Send  
Function Setting Tool,in the e-Manual.)  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction to Using Scanner Functions  
ScanGear MF:  
Install the scanner driver ScanGear MF. ScanGear MF enables you to use the machine as scanner. (See “About  
User Software CD-ROM,in the Starter Guide.)  
USB connection:  
Connect the machine to your computer with the USB cable. (See “USB Connection,in the Starter Guide.)  
The scanner driver is available only through a USB connection.  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Scanning Operations  
Basic Scanning Operations  
This section describes the basic procedures for scanning documents.  
Scanning Documents to a  
Computer  
Press [Start] on the machine.  
3
– If you are asked to select a program to launch,  
selectMF Toolbox Ver4.9.”The scanned  
document will be processed according to  
your settings.  
– When scanning is complete, a folder with the  
scanning date will be created in the [My  
Pictures] folder in the [My Documents] folder,  
and your document will be saved in this  
folder. (For Windows Vista/7, the folder will be  
created in the [Pictures] folder.)  
You can scan documents and transmit the scanned  
data to your computer using the operation panel of  
the machine.  
– Your machine must be connected via an USB cable and the  
USB scanner driver must be loaded to scan. This machine does  
not support network scanning.  
– Scanning speed may be slower when sending an e-mail or  
scanning documents to a file server in B&W format.  
Scanning Documents to a File  
Server (D1180/D1170)  
Place documents.  
1
This section describes the basic procedure for  
sending scanned documents to a computer that  
acts as a file server on a network.  
You can specify the file server addresses only with one-touch  
keys, coded dial codes, or  
a file server using  
[Address Book]. You cannot specify  
[numeric keys] and [Tone]. See  
,
“Specifying Destinations (Scan to File Server),in the e-Manual.  
Place documents.  
1
Press  
[SCAN] on the machine.  
2
The SCAN indicator lights up and the machine  
enters the scan standby mode.  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Scanning Operations  
Press  
[SEND/FAX].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select the file format,  
2
3
6
7
The SEND/FAX indicator lights up and the  
machine enters the send standby mode.  
FILE FORMAT  
PDF  
Press  
[SEND/FAX] repeatedly to  
select <E-MAIL:B&W> or <E-MAIL:  
COLOR>, then press [OK].  
– File server (B&W): <PDF>, <TIFF(B&W)>  
– File server (Color): <PDF(COMPACT)>, <JPEG>  
E - M A I L : B & W  
S E L E C T : O K  
Press  
or  
to select <ON> or <OFF>  
for <DIVIDE INTO PAGES>, then press  
[OK].  
DIVIDE INTO PAGES  
ON  
If you want to send color images to the file server,  
select <E-MAIL: COLOR> as the sending method.  
– <OFF>: Sends multiple images as a single file  
without dividing them.  
Specify the file server’s address.  
4
5
– <ON>: Separates multiple images and send  
them as separate files.  
Ex.  
server1  
[01]SERVER 1  
– You can specify the file server addresses only  
with one-touch keys, coded dial codes, or  
[Address Book].  
– For information how to specify the file server’s  
address, seeSpecifying Destinations (Scan to  
File Server),in the e-Manual.  
If you have selected <JPEG> in step 6, this setting  
is not available. <DIVIDE INTO PAGES> is  
automatically set to <ON> when sending  
documents in JPEG format.  
– If you want to start sending without adjusting  
the optional send settings, skip to step 10.  
Press  
or  
to select the resolution,  
8
then press [OK].  
Press [OK] repeatedly until <FILE  
FORMAT> is displayed.  
RESOLUTION  
200 200dpi  
– File server (B&W): <200×200dpi>,  
<300×300dpi>, <400×400dpi>,  
<600×600dpi>, <150×150dpi>,  
<200×100dpi>  
– File server (Color): <200×200dpi>,  
<300×300dpi>, <100×100dpi>,  
<150×150dpi>  
If <PDF(COMPACT)> is selected as the file format,  
only <300×300dpi> can be selected.  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Scanning Operations  
Press  
or  
to select the original  
9
type, then press [OK].  
ORIGINAL TYPE  
TEXT/PHOTO  
– <TEXT/PHOTO>: For documents that contain  
text and photos.  
– <TEXT>: For text documents.  
– <PHOTO>: For documents that contain fine  
text or photos.  
If you have selected <PDF(COMPACT)> as the file  
format in step 6, the original type is automatically  
set to <TEXT/PHOTO>.  
Press [Start].  
10 When you place the documents on the platen  
glass, press  
or  
to select the document  
size, then press [Start] for each document.  
When scanning is complete, press [OK] to start  
sending.  
– You can also adjust the following scan settings  
as necessary.  
Density:Adjusting Density (Scan to File  
Server),in the e-Manual.  
2-sided:2-Sided Documents (Scan to File  
Server),in the e-Manual.  
– You can set the document’s name (seeNaming  
a Sent Document Using a File Server,in the e-  
Manual).  
8-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Canceling Scan Jobs  
Canceling Scan Jobs  
This section describes how to cancel scan jobs.  
Canceling Scanning Documents to  
a Computer  
When the <STOP KEY PRESSED> message  
appears, press [OK].  
2
When scanning using the ADF:  
During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is  
displayed on the computer screen.  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
PRESS OK KEY  
Press [Stop/Reset] on the operation  
1
2
panel.  
When scanning using the platen glass:  
Click [OK] on the computer screen.  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
Canceling Scanning Documents to  
a File Server (D1180/D1170)  
For sending jobs, remove any unscanned  
documents from the ADF.  
Follow this procedure to cancel a transmission in  
progress.  
You can also cancel a transmission from the Status Monitor  
screen. (SeeChecking/Deleting Scanning Data,in the e-  
Manual.)  
Press [Stop/Reset].  
1
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network  
9
This chapter describes what a network is, what you can do with a network, and what you need to do to use the  
machine with a network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flowchart for Setting Up Network  
Flowchart for Setting Up Network  
Follow the procedures in the flowchart below to set up each network function.  
* The functions of sending faxes or e-mails, or scanning documents to the sharing folder of a computer are available.  
9-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What is the Network?  
What is the Network?  
In the computer field, a network is a system of interconnected computers that communicate  
with each other. “Internet” and “LAN” are the two most common words used to refer to  
networks. The Internet is the vast network to which computers all over the world are  
connected. Computers connected to the Internet anywhere in the world can exchange  
information with one another. On the other hand, LAN is the abbreviation for “Local Area  
Network” and means a network within a limited area (in an office, for example).  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of Network Functions  
Overview of Network Functions  
This section describes actions you can perform using the network functions.  
E-Mail  
Network  
PC Fax  
File server  
(File sharing)  
You can send scanned  
documents as e-mail  
attachments.  
You can transfer data from your  
computer to the machine and send  
them by fax from the machine.  
You can scan documents to  
the computer’s shared folder.  
e-Manual  
e-Manual  
e-Manual  
• Refer to “E-Mail”  
• Refer to “PC Fax”  
• Refer to “Scan”  
Network  
Print  
Remote UI  
You can print over the  
network.  
You can register and make settings  
for this product’s functions over  
the network from your computer.  
e-Manual  
e-Manual  
• Refer to “Print”  
• Refer to “Settings from a PC”  
9-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Settings from a  
PC  
10  
The Remote UI enables you to easily manage the machine from a computer on the network.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview of Remote UI  
Overview of Remote UI  
The Remote UI enables you to check the machines status and manage the machines  
functions from a computer on the network using a web browser. Using the computer  
keyboard, the management process, such as entering addresses to the address book will be  
easier.  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview of Remote UI  
By using Remote UI, you can set and confirm following functions.  
Checking Device Information  
from a Computer  
Managing Jobs From a  
Computer  
The Remote UI enables you to check  
the device information, such as device  
status, device information, device  
feature, network settings and counter  
information. Accessing to the device  
information from a distant place  
provides you with easy device  
management.  
The Remote UI enables you to manage  
print jobs being processed by the  
machine, or held in the print queue. It  
also enables you to view the print job  
log and the sending, storing and  
receiving results of fax jobs. Accessing  
to the job information from a distant  
place provides you with easy job  
management.  
For details, see “Checking Device  
Status and Information,in the e-  
Manual.  
For details, see “Job Management,in  
the e-Manual.  
Editing the Address Book  
From a Computer  
Setting/Registering From a  
Computer  
The Remote UI enables you to make  
additions and changes to each item of  
the address book. You can use the  
keyboard of the computer, so entering  
large amount of addresses to the  
address book will be easier. You can  
also edit the one-touch speed dial and  
coded dial.  
The Remote UI enables you to specify  
the machines system settings,  
forwarding settings, the department  
ID and user ID, import and export  
function, and device custom settings.  
You can specify the various custom  
system settings more easily and  
speedy.  
For details, see “Managing the  
Address Book,in the e-Manual.  
For details, see “Customizing System  
Settings,in the e-Manual.  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the Remote UI  
Starting the Remote UI  
To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.  
Before you start the Remote UI, perform the followings:  
– Select <VIEW IP ADDRESS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> located in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>, and verify the IP address of the  
machine. If you do not know the IP address, consult with your network administrator. (SeeConfirming IP Address  
Settings,in the e-Manual.)  
– If the IP address is not displayed, check if the machine is correctly connected to the computer. For details, seeSet Up  
Network Connection,in the e-Manual.  
– Set <REMOTE UI> to <ON> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. (SeeRestricting the Remote UI,in the e-Manual.)  
Prepare the Network.  
Enter the IP address of the machine in  
[Address] or [Location], then press [Enter]  
on the keyboard.  
1
2
3
Set up the machine for use in a network, then  
connect the machine and the computer to your  
network router or a hub.  
For details, seeSet UP Computers and Software,”  
in the Starter Guide.  
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/  
For details on how to check the IP address, see  
“Confirming IP Address Settings,in the e-  
Manual.  
The Remote UI screen appears.  
Start the web browser.  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting the Remote UI  
In case no management mode is set, and  
Enter the required data.  
system manager ID and password are set:  
4
The required data differs depending on the  
authentication mode you are using.  
Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User  
Mode].  
For default settings:  
Select [Administrator Mode] or [End-User  
Mode].  
For Administrator Mode, enter the system  
manager password, and click OK. For End-  
User Mode, enter the user ID and click [OK].  
Enter the password or user name and click  
[OK].  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting the Remote UI  
For Department ID Management mode:  
Operate the machine.  
5
Enter the department ID and password, and  
click [OK].  
Now you can manage the machine on the web  
browser.  
For details, seeSettings from a PC,in the e-  
Manual.  
For User Management mode:  
Enter the user ID and password, and click  
[OK].  
If no password is set, you can log on without  
entering a password.  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning the Machine  
Cleaning the Machine  
Note the following before cleaning your machine:  
– Make sure no documents are stored in memory when you turn OFF the main power switch  
and disconnect the power cord.  
– Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.  
– Do not use tissue paper, paper towels, or similar materials for cleaning; they can stick to  
the components or generate static charges.  
Never use volatile liquids such as thinner, benzene, acetone, or any other chemical cleaner to clean the machine. These can  
damage the machine components.  
When you turn OFF the main power switch, the documents stored in memory will be erased. To check the jobs stored in memory,  
see the following:  
– “Checking/Changing the Status of Scan to File Server Documents,in the e-Manual.  
– “Checking/Changing the Status of E-Mail Documents,in the e-Manual.  
Exterior  
Fixing Unit  
Clean the exterior of the machine.  
If black streaks appear with printing, the Fixing Unit  
in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur,  
clean the Fixing Unit in the following procedure.  
The Fixing Unit should also be cleaned each time  
the toner cartridge is replaced.  
Turn OFF the main power switch and  
disconnect the power cord.  
1
2
Wipe the machine’s exterior with a clean,  
soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water  
or diluted dishwashing detergent  
solution.  
– Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.  
– Cleaning the Fixing Unit takes approximately 150 seconds.  
– When some jobs are stored in memory, this function is not  
available.  
Wait for the machine to dry, then  
reconnect the power cord and turn ON  
the main power switch.  
3
Press [Menu].  
1
11-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cleaning the Machine  
Perform from step 1 to step 3 again.  
Press  
or  
to select <ADJUST./  
7
8
2
3
4
CLEANING>, then press [OK].  
Press  
or  
to select <START  
MENU  
CLEANING>, then press [OK].  
8.ADJUST./CLEANING  
FIX.UNIT CLEANING  
2.START CLEANING  
Press  
or  
to select <FIX.UNIT  
CLEANING>, then press [OK].  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
ADJUST./CLEANING  
1.FIX.UNIT CLEANING  
9
START CLEANING?  
< YES  
NO >  
Press  
or  
to select <CLEAN PAPER  
Cleaning starts. When finished, the display  
returns to the standby mode.  
PRT>, then press [OK].  
FIX UNIT CLEANING  
1.CLEAN PAPER PRT  
– Throw away the cleaning paper after use.  
– The cleaning process cannot be canceled.  
Please wait until it is completed.  
– If a cleaning paper jam occurs, the error  
Make sure that LTR paper is loaded in a paper  
source.  
indicator flashes red. Press  
[Stop/Reset] and  
remove the jammed cleaning paper.  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
Automatic Feeder Cleaning  
5
6
OK TO PRINT?  
< YES  
If your documents have black streaks or appear  
dirty after scanning them through the ADF, clean  
the ADF roller by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of  
paper through it.  
NO >  
The cleaning page is printed.  
Load the cleaning page in the multi-  
purpose tray with the printed side facing  
down.  
Use standard paper as the cleaning paper.  
Press [MENU].  
1
Press  
or  
to select <ADJUST./  
CLEANING>, then press [OK].  
2
MENU  
8.ADJUST./CLEANING  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Cleaning the Machine  
Clean the platen glass and the underside  
of the ADF with a cloth dampened with  
water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry  
cloth.  
Press  
or  
to select <FEEDER  
3
4
3
4
CLEANING>, then press [OK].  
ADJUST./CLEANING  
2.FEEDER CLEANING  
Load 10 sheets of blank LTR paper into  
the ADF, then press [OK].  
SET 10 SHEETS IN ADF  
PRESS OK KEY  
ADF cleaning starts. When finished, the display  
returns to the standby mode.  
Scanning Area  
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may  
tear the document or damage the machine.  
Keep the scanning area clean to avoid dirty copies  
or faxes to be sent.  
Close the ADF.  
Platen Glass  
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the ADF  
by following the procedure below.  
Turn OFF the main power switch and  
disconnect the power cord.  
1
2
Open the ADF.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
11-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Machine  
Close the ADF cover.  
ADF  
4
If your documents have black streaks or appear  
dirty after copying them using the ADF, this may be  
caused by pencil lead rubbing off the documents  
and onto the roller. Clean the ADF scanning area  
and roller.  
Turn OFF the main power switch and  
disconnect the power cord.  
1
2
Open the ADF cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Open the ADF.  
5
6
Clean the rollers (A) inside the ADF with a  
cloth dampened with water. Then wipe  
the area with a soft, dry cloth.  
3
Clean the ADF scanning area (on the left  
side of the platen glass (A)) with a cloth  
dampened with water. Then wipe the  
area with a soft, dry cloth.  
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may  
tear the document or damage the machine.  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Machine  
Close the ADF.  
7
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
11-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
This section describes how to replace or handle the toner cartridges and precautions on  
storing them.  
When a Message Appears  
Toner cartridges are consumable products. If the toner is running low or out during printing, a message  
appears in the display.  
Message  
When it is Displayed  
Contents and Remedies  
TONER LOW  
PREPARE NEW TONER  
The toner is running low.  
– Distribute toner in the toner  
– It is recommended that you replace  
the toner cartridge before printing  
a large amount of data.  
– If the message persists, replace the  
on p. 11-9.)  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Open the front cover.  
Redistributing Toner  
3
4
5
When the toner is running low and the message  
<TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER> appears on  
the display, redistribute toner in the toner cartridge.  
We recommend that you prepare a new toner  
cartridge for future replacement with ease.  
When <KEEP PRINTING> is set, the printed documents may be  
light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased when  
the documents are printed out, so you can not print the same  
documents again. (SeeTX/RX SETTINGS ,on p. 13-6.)  
Remove the toner cartridge.  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray,  
1
fold multi-purpose tray extension, push  
back the auxiliary tray into place, and  
then close the multi-purpose tray.  
Gently rock the toner cartridge several  
times to evenly distribute toner inside.  
Push the open button.  
2
11-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Align the toner cartridge to the guides in  
the machine and slide the cartridge  
completely into the machine until it  
stops.  
6
7
– When <KEEP PRINTING> is set, the printed documents may be  
light or blurred because of lack of toner. The data is erased  
when the documents are printed out, so you can not print the  
same documents again. (SeeTX/RX SETTINGS ,on p. 13-6.)  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray,  
1
2
3
fold multi-purpose tray extension, push  
back the auxiliary tray into place, and  
then close the multi-purpose tray.  
Close the front cover.  
Push the open button.  
– Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
– If you cannot close the front cover, do not force  
it to close. Open the cover and make sure the  
toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.  
Open the front cover.  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge with  
a New One  
When the message <OUT OF TONER/CHANGE TONER>  
appears, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.  
When toner empty error occurs while receiving fax,  
printing fax is interrupted and the received data will  
be stored in the memory. If you set <KEEP  
PRINTING>, you can keep printing fax documents or  
reports without replacing the toner cartridge. (See  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Remove the toner cartridge.  
Gently rock the toner cartridge several  
times to evenly distribute toner inside.  
4
6
7
Take out the toner cartridge from the bag.  
5
If toner is not distributed evenly, this may result in  
deterioration in print quality. Make sure to carry  
out this procedure properly.  
Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface,  
fold back the tab of the sealing tape (A)  
located at left side of the toner cartridge,  
then pull the seal completely out.  
Do not open the drum protective shutter (A).  
Save the protective bag. You may need it later  
when you remove the toner cartridge from the  
machine.  
11-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing the Toner Cartridge  
Close the front cover.  
9
– If the sealing tape is pulled out forcefully or  
stopped at midpoint, toner may spill out.  
– If toner is adhered on the removed seal, be  
careful that your hands or clothes do not get  
dirty from touching the toner.  
– If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching  
the toner, wash them immediately in cold  
water. Do not use hot water. If you do, the toner  
may be set permanently.  
– Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
– If you cannot close the front cover, do not force  
it to close. Open the cover and make sure the  
toner cartridge is properly set in the machine.  
Do not pull the seal out at an angle.  
Align the toner cartridge to the guides in  
the machine and slide the cartridge  
completely into the machine until it  
stops.  
8
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called  
“The Clean Earth Campaign. This program preserves precious natural  
resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used cartridges  
that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the  
same time, keeps the environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste.  
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge  
box.  
The Clean Earth Campaign - The Canon Cartridge Return Program  
The Canon Cartridge Return Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth Campaign, which  
supports four critical environmental areas:  
Recycling in the Workplace  
Conserving Environmental Resources  
Scientific Research and Education  
Encouraging Appreciation of the Outdoors  
“Clean Earthinitiatives supported by Canon in the U.S. include Eyes on Yellowstone, Canon Envirothon,  
NATURE Series on PBS and The Canon Clean Earth Crew. Initiatives supported in Canada include Canon  
Envirothon and World Wildlife Fund - Canada.  
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Return Program has collected millions of cartridges that otherwise  
would have been discarded into landfills or similar facilities. Instead, this rapidly growing program recovers  
used cartridges and separates them into components which are then put to various industrial uses.  
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow  
the instructions detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.  
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Return Program.  
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.  
Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.  
This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.  
11-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycling Used Cartridges  
U.S.A. PROGRAM  
Packagꢀng  
One Box Return  
To receive your free eight cartridge collection box:  
Call 1-800-OK-CANON  
or  
Visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return  
OR  
Place as many cartridges as possible into one box. Carefully seal the box with tape;  
OR  
Place an empty toner cartridge in the box that contained your new toner cartridge.  
11-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Bundled Return  
Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.  
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications (See Below).  
Maximum weight = 70 pounds Maximum length = 108 inches  
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130 inches  
Please Note:  
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.  
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as  
provided in the warranty.  
11-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Shꢀppꢀng  
Make sure the UPS A.R.S. label is applied.  
UPS Pick-up  
Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery.  
Call 1-800-PICK-UPS for Drop-Off options in your area.  
By using either of the above methods of shipment, your used cartridge(s) will be forwarded to the Canon  
Cartridge Collection Center at no charge to you.  
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use UPS authorized return label.  
Alternative return service with the U.S. Postal Service is available by calling  
1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth/return  
For further information about the Clean Earth Campaign in the United States,  
please call: 1-800-OK-CANON or visit www.usa.canon.com/cleanearth  
11-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Canadian Program – Programme au Canada  
Single Box Return  
Repackage the empty toner cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new  
cartridge’s box.  
Place the empty toner cartridge in the box from your new toner cartridge. Seal the box.  
Apply the Canon Canada Inc./ Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially  
marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
Deposit your empty toner cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet  
or franchise.  
11-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recycling Used Cartridges  
Volume Box Return (Maximum 8 Cartridges)  
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.  
Please tape your eight cartridges together and place them in a box.  
Apply the Canon Canada Inc. / Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially  
marked so that Canon pays the postage.  
Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement  
with Canada Post may have their collection box picked up.  
Working to protect the environment is a long-standing Canon interest. To this end, for every cartridge  
collected, Canon Canada donates funds to World Wildlife Fund - Canada and the Canon Envirothon.  
For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please write to Canon.  
Canon Canada Inc.  
Corporate Customer Relations  
6390 Dixie Road  
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7  
11-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transporting the Machine  
Transporting the Machine  
This section describes the required procedures before transporting the machine.  
Follow this procedure to avoid vibration damage to  
the machine when transporting it over a long  
distance.  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray,  
fold multi-purpose tray extension, push  
back the auxiliary tray into place, and  
then close the multi-purpose tray.  
3
– Do not lift the machine by any of its attachments. Dropping  
the machine can cause personal injury.  
– If you are using the Cassette Feeding Module-U1 (optional),  
transport the machine and the Cassette Feeding Module-U1  
separately. If you transport the machine with the Cassette  
Feeding Module-U1 being installed, you may drop the  
machine.  
– If you have a back problem, make sure to check the weight of  
this machine before carrying. (See“Specifications,on p. 14-2.)  
Turn OFF the main power switch.  
1
Disconnect the power cord and all the  
If you are using the sub-output tray, close the  
sub-output tray.  
2
cables from the back of the machine.  
Push the open button.  
4
11-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transporting the Machine  
Open the front cover.  
5
6
Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.  
Close the front cover.  
7
8
Remove the toner cartridge.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Pull out the paper cassette gently.  
– To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light,  
place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick  
cloth.  
– Do not open the drum protective shutter (A) on  
the toner cartridge. Print quality may  
deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to  
light or is damaged.  
11-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transporting the Machine  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands  
and remove it from the machine.  
9
If you are using the Cassette Feeding  
Module-U1 (optional):  
Pick up the machine using the hand grips  
on the left and right of the machine.  
To install the Optional Paper Cassette, perform the  
uninstalling procedure in reverse.  
Grip the handles on both sides of the  
machine and lift it carefully, as shown in  
the illustration below.  
10  
11-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Jams  
Clearing Jams  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER>, <CHECK DOCUMENT>, <PAPER JAM/LIFT PANEL TO OPEN>,  
<FEEDER PAPER JAM/CHECK THE FEEDER> or <DOCUMENT TOO LONG> appears on the  
display, remove jammed paper from the machine first, then from the paper cassette or  
multi-purpose tray if necessary. Check the following if you experience repeated paper jams:  
– Fan and tap the paper stack on a flat surface before loading it in the machine.  
– Check that the paper you are using meets the requirements for use. (See “Paper  
– Make sure you have removed any scraps of paper from the inside of the machine.  
– When removing jammed documents or paper, take care not to cut your fingers on the edges of the document or paper.  
– When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other  
metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.  
– If you tear the paper, remove any torn pieces to avoid further jams.  
– If your hands or clothes get dirty from touching the toner, wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use hot water. If  
you do, the toner may be set permanently.  
Do not force a jammed document or paper out of the machine. Contact Canon Customer Care Center if needed.  
Lift the release lever (A) until it clicks into  
place.  
Document Jams  
2
When <CHECK DOCUMENT>, <FEEDER PAPER JAM/  
CHECK THE FEEDER> or <DOCUMENT TOO LONG>  
appears on the display, remove a jammed  
document from the ADF.  
Open the ADF cover.  
1
When you lift the release lever (A), the inner cover  
opens.  
12-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing Jams  
Hold both sides of any jammed  
documents and gently pull them out  
straight upward.  
Remove the jammed document.  
3
4
5
6
Do not force a jammed document out of the  
machine. If the jammed document cannot be  
removed easily, go to the next step.  
Do not force a jammed document out of the  
machine. If the jammed document cannot be  
removed easily, go to the next step.  
Remove Jammed paper while lifting the  
document feeder tray, holding it by its  
grip (A).  
Open the inner cover.  
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine  
as it may tear.  
12-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Jams  
Return the document feeder tray to the  
original position.  
Open the ADF and then hold both sides  
of any jammed documents and gently  
pull them out.  
7
10  
11  
Close the ADF.  
Close the inner cover.  
8
9
Close the ADF cover.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Paper Jams  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER>, <OPEN PRINTER  
COVER/OPEN REAR COVER>,  
<PAPER JAM/LIFT PANEL TO OPEN> or <OUTPUT  
TRAY FULL> appears on the display, remove the  
jammed paper from the machine first, then from  
the paper cassette or multi-purpose tray if  
necessary.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
If the error messages still remains after having removed the  
jammed paper, open and close the front cover to reset the  
machine.  
12-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Clearing Jams  
Close the rear cover.  
Rear Sꢀde of the Machꢀne  
3
4
5
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER/OPEN REAR COVER>  
or <PAPER JAM/LIFT PANEL TO OPEN> appears on  
the display, remove jammed paper from the rear  
cover and duplex unit cover.  
Open the rear cover.  
1
Open the duplex unit cover.  
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and  
gently pull it out.  
2
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and  
gently pull it out.  
Be careful not to touch the surroundings of the  
sub-output tray.  
12-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Close the duplex unit cover.  
Front Sꢀde of the Machꢀne  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <PAPER JAM/LIFT  
PANEL TO OPEN> appears on the display, remove  
jammed paper from the inside of the machine.  
6
Push the open button.  
1
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
7
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover.  
Open the front cover.  
2
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Remove the toner cartridge from the  
machine.  
3
12-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Remove the Jammed paper from the  
machine.  
– Remove watches and any bracelets or rings  
when touching the inside of the machine.  
These items might be damaged if they come  
into contact with the parts inside of the  
machine.  
– To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light,  
place it in its protective bag or wrap it in a thick  
cloth.  
– Do not open the drum protective shutter on  
the toner cartridge. Print quality may  
deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to  
light or is damaged.  
When the jammed paper was not removed.  
Lift the roller cover by its center tab and  
hold it.  
Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle.  
Remove the jammed paper from inside of  
the machine.  
4
Lift the transport guide by its corner tab  
and hold it.  
Remove the Jammed paper from the  
machine.  
Slide and push the jammed paper into the  
machine until the front edge of jammed  
paper comes out.  
12-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clearing Jams  
Align the toner cartridge to the guides in  
Hold the front side of the operation panel  
with your hands.  
5
the machine and slide the cartridge  
completely into the machine until it  
stops.  
1
2
3
Lift the scanning platform (A) until it is  
locked. (You will hear an audible “click.)  
Close the front cover.  
6
Hold both sides of the jammed paper and  
gently pull it out.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Output Tray  
When <OUTPUT TRAY FULL> appears on the  
display, remove jammed paper from the output  
tray.  
12-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
– Do not force a jammed paper out of the  
machine.  
– The surroundings of the output tray are hot  
during printing or immediately after printing.  
When taking out of the paper or removing  
jammed paper, do not touch the surroundings  
of the output tray.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Multꢀ-Purpose Tray  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <PAPER JAM/LIFT  
PANEL TO OPEN> appears on the display, remove  
jammed paper from the multi-purpose tray.  
If unfixed toner is on the removed paper, it may  
adhere to the paper to be printed next.  
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and  
gently pull it out.  
1
Lower the scanning platform.  
4
5
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Close the multi-purpose tray.  
2
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
12-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
Push downward on the jammed paper as  
you remove it.  
3
2
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.  
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off.  
Gently push the paper cassette back into  
the machine until it clicks into place in  
the closed position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Paper Cassette  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <PAPER JAM/LIFT  
PANEL TO OPEN> appears on the display, remove  
jammed paper from the paper cassette.  
Pull the paper cassette half way out.  
1
12-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
Push downward on the jammed paper as  
you remove it.  
4
2
3
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.  
Doing so may result in the feed roller coming off.  
Gently push the optional paper cassette  
back into the machine until it clicks into  
place in the closed position.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Optꢀonal Paper Cassette  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <PAPER JAM/LIFT  
PANEL TO OPEN> appears on the display, remove  
jammed paper from the optional paper cassette.  
Pull the optional paper cassette half way  
out.  
1
12-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
Hold the paper cassette with both hands  
and remove it from the machine.  
4
2
3
Open the duplex print transport guide,  
holding its tab (A) on the left side inside  
of the machine.  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Duplex Unꢀt  
When <OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <PAPER JAM/LIFT  
PANEL TO OPEN> appears on the display, remove  
jammed paper from the duplex unit.  
Hold both sides of any jammed paper and  
gently pull it out.  
Pull out the paper cassette.  
4
1
Do not force a jammed paper out of the machine.  
12-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clearing Jams  
Close the duplex print transport guide.  
Open and close the front cover to reset  
the machine.  
5
6
7
Hold the paper cassette with both hands  
and set it back into the machine.  
If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it  
before opening the front cover. To open the  
front cover, push the open button (A).  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.  
12-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Messages  
Display Messages  
See the table below when the error and status messages appear on the display.  
Message  
Description  
Action  
AVAILABLE MEMORY  
nn%  
This message shows the percentage of the  
memory currently available.  
If you need more space, wait for the machine  
to send any documents in memory. Also  
print, send, or delete any documents stored  
in memory.  
CANNOT PRINT RX  
DATA  
FIX ERROR TO PRINT  
The machine temporarily received the fax in  
memory because an error of some kind has  
occurred in the machine.  
This error message appears with one of the  
messages below.  
This error message appears with another  
message. When the error is resolved, the  
received data will be printed out. For how  
to solve the problem, see the action for the  
messages displayed with it.  
– <TONER COVER OPEN/CLOSE COVER>  
– <LOAD CORRECT PAPER>  
– <PAPER IN MP TRAY/REMOVE PAPER>  
– <CHANGE REG'D SIZE/ PAPER SETTINGS>  
– <TONER LOW/PREPARE NEW TONER>  
– <SET TONER AGAIN>  
– <PAPER JAM/LIFT PANEL TO OPEN>  
– <LOAD PAPER>  
CANNOT SEND  
– You have specified the group dialing when – Specify the recipient other than group  
the line is off the hook.  
dialing.  
CHECK SETTINGS  
– You have specified the one-touch key or  
coded dial code that has registered with  
other than fax number when the line is off  
the hook.  
– Make sure that the line is disconnected.  
– The registered group is already nested for  
three levels of subgroups (e.g., a group  
registered in a group).  
– You cannot register a group to contain  
more than three levels of subgroups.  
Modify the group so that it contains three  
levels of groups or less.  
CHANGE PAPERSIZE  
The paper size is not appropriate for a 2-sided Set the paper size to <LTR> or <A4>, then  
copy.  
load paper of the same size.  
CHANGE REG’D SIZE  
PAPER SETTINGS  
– The paper size is not appropriate for  
printing a report or list.  
– Set the paper size to <A4>, <LTR>, <LGL>,  
<FLSP>, <OFICIO>, <B-OFI>, or <M-OFI>,  
and then load paper of the same size.  
– The paper ran out while printing a received – Load paper in the paper cassette.  
document, report or list.  
– The size of the paper in the paper cassette  
or multi-purpose tray is different from that  
of the paper specified in <CASSETTE 1>,  
<CASSETTE 2> (optional) or <MP TRAY>,  
which are displayed by pressing [Paper  
Settings].  
– Change the paper size in <CASSETTE 1>,  
<CASSETTE 2> (optional) or <MP TRAY>,  
which are displayed by pressing [Paper  
Settings], which are displayed by pressing  
12-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
CHECK DOCUMENT  
A document jam may have occurred in the  
ADF.  
Remove the jammed document.  
COLOR MODE IS SET  
CANNOT MULTI DEST  
TX  
You have specified multiple recipients when  
using a color sending.  
When using a color sending, you can specify  
only one recipient. Send one by one, or use  
black and white sending.  
DATA ERROR  
PRESS START KEY  
The machine may have trouble.  
Press [Start] to restore all settings to the  
default. If the message persists, contact  
Canon Customer Care Center.  
DOCUMENT TOO  
LONG  
The document fed from the ADF is longer  
than 24 7/8” (630 mm), or is not feeding  
correctly.  
– Scan the document on the platen glass.  
– Reduce the length of the document to  
within 24 7/8" (630 mm), then try again.  
FEEDER PAPER JAM  
CHECK THE FEEDER  
A document jam may have occurred in the  
ADF.  
Remove the jammed document.  
INITIALIZING...  
PLEASE WAIT  
This message appears when turning ON the  
main power switch, or when the machine is  
not ready for printing.  
Wait until the message disappears.  
LOAD CORRECT  
PAPER  
The size of the paper in the paper cassette  
or multi-purpose tray is different from that  
of the paper specified in <CASSETTE 1>,  
<CASSETTE 2> (optional) or <MP TRAY>,  
which are displayed by pressing [Paper  
Settings].  
Load the correct size paper or change the  
paper size in <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE  
2> (optional) or <MP TRAY>, which are  
displayed by pressing [Paper Settings]. For  
LOAD PAPER  
– No paper is loaded in the paper cassette  
or multi-purpose tray when copying or  
printing.  
– Load paper correctly. Then press [OK] when  
using the paper cassette.  
– No paper is loaded in the paper cassette  
or multi-purpose tray when printing a  
received document.  
– Load paper correctly. Then press [OK] when  
using the paper cassette.  
For report or list, set the paper size to  
<A4>, <LTR>, <LGL>, <FLSP>, <OFICIO>,  
<B-OFI>, or <M-OFI>, and then load paper  
of the same size.  
Or, when printing a report or list, this  
message appears if the paper size is not  
appropriate for printing a report or list  
even if paper is loaded. This error message  
appears with one of the messages below.  
<CHANGE REG’D SIZE/PAPER SETTINGS>  
<CANNOT PRINT RX DATA/FIX ERROR TO  
PRINT>  
12-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
MEMORY FULL  
– The machine is full of jobs.  
– Print, send, or delete any documents  
stored in memory.  
– Divide the document stack or data into a  
few parts and try again one by one.  
– Send the document with low resolution.  
– When this message appears during using  
the ADF, the scanning document stops  
halfway. In this case, clear the paper jam  
from the ADF.  
– The number of TX/RX jobs that can be  
stored in memory reached the maximum.  
– The maximum numbers of jobs that can be  
stored in memory are as follows (Based on  
the condition that the other party sends  
the fax by the imageCLASS D1180 with ITU-  
T No.1 Chart standard mode); Up to 70 jobs  
for sending or 90 jobs for receiving, 95 fax  
jobs including sending and receiving, or  
75 e-mail and I-fax jobs for receiving. Wait  
for the machine to send any documents  
in memory. Also print, send, or delete any  
documents stored in memory.  
NOT AVAILABLE NOW – You pressed the one-touch key or coded  
Register the one-touch key or coded dial  
dial code that has already been registered, code that is not used.  
when you are registering group addresses.  
– You selected the group dialing that has  
already been registered, when you are  
registering a one-touch key or coded dial  
code.  
NOT REGISTERED  
OVER PAGE LIMIT  
No recipient is registered for the one-touch  
key or coded dial code you pressed.  
Register the recipients before using the  
Address Book function.  
You cannot print because the page limit has  
been reached.  
Contact your system manager.  
PAPER IN MP TRAY  
REMOVE PAPER  
Paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray.  
Remove the paper from the multi-purpose  
tray. The machine will not print faxes, reports,  
or lists when paper is loaded in the multi-  
purpose tray. They will be stored in memory.  
PAPER JAM  
LIFT PANEL TO OPEN  
Paper jams have occurred in the machine.  
<OPEN PRINTER COVER> or <OPEN REAR  
COVER> appears alternately.  
cassette or multi-purpose tray. The cover  
must be opened and closed to resume the  
current job.  
PHONE OFF HOOK  
HANG UP PHONE  
The external telephone is off the hook.  
The machine is not ready for scanning.  
Hang up the external telephone.  
PREPARING  
SCANNER..  
Wait until the machine is ready.  
PLEASE WAIT  
12-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Messages  
Message  
Description  
Action  
START AGAIN  
A transmission error has occurred because  
the line condition was poor.  
Check the line condition, then try again.  
STOP KEY PRESSED  
PRESS OK KEY  
Press [OK], then set the document again.  
[Stop/Reset] has been pressed while  
scanning the document using the ADF.  
SYSTEM ERROR  
Some kind of error has occurred in the  
machine.  
Turn OFF the main power switch, wait for  
more than 10 seconds, then turn it ON again.  
If the message persists, turn OFF the main  
power switch, disconnect the power cord,  
and contact Canon Customer Care Center.  
TONER COVER OPEN  
CLOSE COVER  
A cover is open.  
Check the cover, and make sure that it is  
completely closed.  
TONER LOW  
The toner is running low.  
Prepare a new toner cartridge.  
PREPARE NEW TONER  
12-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
An error code is a four-digit code shown on an ERROR TX REPORT or an RX ERROR REPORT  
when an error occurs.  
For details on reports, see “Summary of Reports and Lists,in the e-Manual.  
See the table below for individual error codes.  
Error Code  
0001  
Description  
Action  
A document may be jammed.  
– An attempt was made to send a document of – Divide the document into smaller parts and  
0003  
24 7/8" (630 mm) or longer from the ADF.  
send from the platen glass.  
– A document takes a long time to send  
because it contains too much data.  
– Reduce the scanning resolution before  
sending.  
– A document takes a long time to receive.  
– Contact the other party and ask them to  
reduce their scanning resolution or divide the  
document into smaller parts for sending.  
– The other fax machine did not respond within – Send the document again. Contact the other  
0005  
35 seconds.  
party and have them check their fax machine.  
If you are making an overseas call, add a  
pause to the number.  
– The other party may not be using a G3 fax  
machine.  
– Check with the other party and send the  
document to a G3 fax machine. If the other  
party does not have a G3 fax machine, try  
sending your document using a transmission  
mode the other party’s fax machine supports.  
12-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Error Code  
0009  
Description  
Action  
The paper has run out or the paper cassette is  
not set properly.  
Load the paper or reset the paper cassette  
properly.  
You could not send because the recipient’s  
machine is out of paper.  
Contact the recipient and ask them to load the  
paper.  
0012  
0018  
There is no reply when you redial. You could not Check that the recipient’s line is not engaged  
send, because your fax signal was not returned  
as the recipient’s line was engaged.  
and try again from the beginning.  
The memory is full.  
Print, send, or delete any documents stored in  
memory.  
0037  
0703  
The memory for image data is full when sending – Wait a few moments, and then try sending  
color documents.  
again after other send jobs are complete.  
– Erase documents stored in memory. If the  
machine still does not operate normally, turn  
the main power OFF, and then back ON.  
The send operation was interrupted because  
the size of the image data is larger than that  
specified in <MAX TX DATA SIZE> in <E-  
MAIL SETTINGS> in <COMMUNICATIONS> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS>.  
– Change the setting for <MAX TX  
DATA SIZE> in <E-MAIL SETTINGS>  
in <COMMUNICATIONS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>.  
0705  
– Select a lower resolution.  
The server is not functioning. The network is  
down (the server is unable to connect to the  
network or was disconnected).  
– Check the recipient’s address.  
– Check that the network is up.  
0751  
0752  
– The SMTP server name for e-mail is not  
correct.  
– Check the SMTP server name in <SMTP  
SERVER> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> matches  
the SMTP server address you checked in  
“Checking Your E-mail Account,” in the e-  
Manual.  
– The domain name or e-mail address may not  
be set.  
– Check that domain name in <DOMAIN  
NAME> in <HOST/DOMAIN NAME> in <DNS  
SETTINGS> in <IPv4 SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP  
SETTINGS> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in  
<SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set correctly.  
– Check that e-mail address in <E-MAIL  
ADDRESS> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set  
correctly.  
– The mail server is not functioning.  
– The network is down.  
– Ask the network administrator to check that  
the mail server is operating properly.  
– Ask the network administrator to check that  
the network is operating properly.  
– While e-mail messages were being sent in  
color, some error occurred.  
– Try sending several times. If the error persists,  
ask the network administrator to check that  
the network is operating properly.  
12-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
A TCP/IP error occurred while sending  
documents to a file server, or sending an e-mail  
message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)  
– Check that the network cable is properly  
connected between the machine and your  
computer.  
0753  
– Check that <USE SMB CLIENT> is set to <ON>.  
(See “Setting Up the Send Files Function of  
the Machine,” in the e-Manual)  
– Check that <SERVER> of the file server  
destination is set correctly. (See “Setting Up  
the Send Files Function of the Machine,” in  
the e-Manual.)  
– Check that <WORKGROUP> is set correctly.  
(See “Setting Up the Send Files Function of  
the Machine,” in the e-Manual.)  
– Set <LM ANNOUNCE> to <ON>. (See “Setting  
Up the Send Files Function of the Machine,” in  
the e-Manual.)  
– Check the settings in Windows Firewall.  
– If the machine still does not operate normally,  
turn OFF the main power switch of the  
machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and  
then turn it ON again.  
– You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not  
functioning correctly.  
– Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.  
0755  
0801  
– The IP address is not set.  
– Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>.  
– When the machine was turned ON, an IP  
address was not assigned to the machine by  
the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.  
– Check <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS>. Or wait a  
while, and then try sending again.  
– A timeout error occurred while the machine  
was communicating with the SMTP server to  
send an e-mail message or receive an I-fax.  
– Check that the SMTP server is functioning  
normally, or check the network status.  
– The SMTP server returned an error while  
trying to connect. The destination is not  
correct. An error occurred on the server side  
during transmission to a file server.  
– Check that the SMTP server is functioning  
normally. Check the network status. Check  
the destination setting. Check the status and  
setting of the file server.  
12-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Error Code  
0802  
Description  
Action  
– The name of the SMTP server is not correct.  
– Check the SMTP server name in <SMTP  
SERVER> in <E-MAIL/I-FAX> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> matches  
the SMTP server address you checked in  
“Checking Your E-mail Account,” in the e-  
Manual.  
– The domain name of the DNS server is not  
correct.  
– Check that domain name in <DOMAIN  
NAME> in <HOST/DOMAIN NAME> in  
<DNS SETTINGS> in <TCP/IP SETTINGS>  
in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS> is set correctly. (See “Setting DNS,”  
in the e-Manual.)  
– The name of the DNS server is not correct.  
– Check that <PRIM. DNS SERVER> and  
<SECOND DNS SERVER> in <DNS SETTINGS>  
in <TCP/IP SETTINGS> in <NETWORK  
SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM SETTINGS> is set  
correctly. (See “Setting DNS,” in the e-Manual.)  
– Connection to the DNS server failed.  
You have no privilege to access the folder.  
– Ask the network administrator to check that  
the DNS server is operating properly.  
Change the setting on the server to enable  
access to the folder.  
0804  
0806  
– An incorrect user name or password was  
specified for the sending of a file to a file  
server.  
– Change the user name or password.  
– An incorrect destination was specified for the – Check the e-mail address.  
sending of an e-mail message.  
– A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection – Check the POP server name in <E-MAIL/I-  
0810  
error occurred while receiving an I-fax.  
FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is  
functioning normally. Check the network  
status.  
– The POP server returned an error during the  
connection.  
– Check the POP server name in <E-MAIL/I-  
FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is  
functioning normally. Check the network  
status.  
– A timeout error occurred on the server while  
connecting to the POP server.  
– Check the POP server name in <E-MAIL/I-  
FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>. Confirm that the POP server is  
functioning normally. Check the network  
status.  
The POP password setting is incorrect.  
Check the POP server password in <E-MAIL/I-  
FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>.  
0812  
12-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Codes (D1180/D1170/D1150)  
Error Code  
Description  
Action  
The POP server name setting is incorrect.  
Check the POP server name in <E-MAIL/I-  
FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
SETTINGS>.  
0813  
You have received data that cannot be  
processed (MIME information is incorrect).  
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to  
resend the data.  
0819  
0820  
0821  
0827  
You have received data that cannot be  
processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).  
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to  
resend the data.  
You have received data that cannot be  
processed (TIFF analysis error).  
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to  
resend the data.  
You have received data that cannot be  
processed (contains MIME information that is  
not supported).  
Check the settings, and then ask the sender to  
resend the data.  
You have received HTML data.  
Ask the sender to use a file format other than  
HTML, and then resend the data.  
0828  
0829  
0839  
Data containing more pages that the machine  
can hold in the memory is received.  
Print the received documents, and ask the  
sender to resend the remaining pages.  
The user name or password for the SMTP  
authentication in <SMTP AUTH> is incorrect.  
Check the user name and password for <SMTP  
AUTH> in <AUTH/ENC SETTINGS> in <E-MAIL/  
I-FAX> in <NETWORK SETTINGS> in <SYSTEM  
Communication reservation is cleared.  
If necessary, try again from the beginning.  
0995  
12-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed  
If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed  
When <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> appears on the display, the size of the paper in the paper  
cassette or multi-purpose tray is different from that of the paper specified in <PAPER SIZE>  
for <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE 2> (optional) or <MP TRAY>. You need to load the correct size  
paper or change the paper size in <PAPER SIZE> for <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE 2>  
(optional) or <MP TRAY>.  
For print jobs, you need to specify the paper size from your computer.  
Reloading the Paper  
Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to  
select <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE 2> or  
<MP TRAY>, then press [OK].  
3
Load the correct size paper as shown on  
the display, then press [OK] to resume the  
job.  
1
CASSETTE 1  
The machine re-starts printing.  
– <CASSETTE 2> is displayed only if the  
optional paper cassette is attached.  
Changing the Paper Size Setting  
– If you select <MP TRAY>, press  
select <ON>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
Follow the procedure below to change the paper  
size setting.  
MP TRAY STD SET  
ON  
For Copy Job  
Press [Stop/Reset].  
Press  
or  
to select the size of the  
1
2
4
5
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
PAPER SIZE(CASS)  
CANCEL?  
<YES  
LTR  
NO>  
Press  
or  
to select the type of the  
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
PAPER TYPE(CASS)  
PLAIN PAPER  
12-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed  
Resume the copy job.  
For Report/Lꢀst Job  
6
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <REPORT STATUS>,  
then press [OK].  
1
For Fax Job  
Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to  
select <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE 2> or  
<MP TRAY>, then press [OK].  
REPORT STATUS  
1
CASSETTE 1  
Press  
or  
to select the job to  
2
cancel, then press [OK].  
– <CASSETTE 2> is displayed only if the  
optional paper cassette is attached.  
Ex.  
0003  
15:50  
*
– If you select <MP TRAY>, press  
select <ON>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
ACTIVITY REPORT  
MP TRAY STD SET  
ON  
The displayed job varies depending on the job  
that you select.  
Press  
or  
to select the size of the  
2
3
4
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select <CANCEL>,  
3
PAPER SIZE(CASS)  
LTR  
Ex.  
0003  
CANCEL  
Press  
or  
to select the type of the  
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
4
5
PAPER TYPE(CASS)  
PLAIN PAPER  
CANCEL?  
<YES  
NO>  
Open and close the paper cassette that  
you set in step 1 to resume the fax job.  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
For the multi-purpose tray, skip this step.  
12-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If <LOAD CORRECT PAPER> is displayed  
Press [Paper Settings] repeatedly to  
select <CASSETTE 1>, <CASSETTE 2> or  
<MP TRAY>, then press [OK].  
Press  
press [OK].  
or  
to select <PRINT>, then  
6
2
3
JOB CANCEL  
PRINT  
CASSETTE 1  
Press  
or  
to select the job to  
– <CASSETTE 2> is displayed only if the  
optional paper cassette is attached.  
cancel, then press [OK].  
– If you select <MP TRAY>, press  
select <ON>, then press [OK].  
or  
to  
Ex.  
0003  
*
test.txt - Notepad  
MP TRAY STD SET  
ON  
Press  
or  
to select the size of the  
The displayed job varies depending on the job  
that you select.  
7
8
9
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
PAPER SIZE(CASS)  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
LTR  
4
CANCEL?  
<YES  
Press  
or  
to select the type of the  
NO>  
paper loaded into the machine, then  
press [OK].  
Press [Stop/Reset] to return to the  
standby mode.  
5
6
PAPER TYPE(CASS)  
PLAIN PAPER  
Select [Output Size] on the printer driver  
to match the setting in the machine, then  
resume the print job.  
Resume the report/list job.  
For Prꢀnt Job  
Press [Job Cancel/Status Monitor]  
repeatedly to select <JOB CANCEL>, then  
press [OK].  
1
JOB CANCEL  
12-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If a Power Failure Occurs  
If a Power Failure Occurs  
If power is suddenly lost due to an outage or accidental unplugging, a built-in battery  
retains the user data settings and the Address Book settings. Any sent or received  
documents stored in memory are backed up for about 15 minutes. During a power cut,  
functions are limited as follows:  
You cannot send, receive, copy, scan, or print documents.  
You may not be able to make telephone calls using an external telephone, depending on  
the type of telephone you use.  
You can receive telephone calls using an external telephone depending on the type of  
telephone you use.  
To fully charge the built-in battery, it takes approximately 12 hours after when the main  
power switch is ON. If the built-in battery is not fully charged, the data may not be saved  
properly.  
12-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
If You Cannot Solve a Problem  
This section describes the customer support services.  
Customer Support (U.S.A.)  
If you cannot solve the problem after having referred to the information in this chapter, contact Canon  
Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON Monday through Friday between the hours of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00  
P.M. EST. On-line support is also available 24 hours a day at the website http://www.canontechsupport.com.  
Customer Support (Canada)  
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:  
For e-mail support, the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to frequently asked questions,  
visit http://www.canon.ca/  
Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still  
under warranty 1-800-652-2666  
If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the above technical support options, repair options are  
available at the time of your call to the live technical support number above or via the website at http://  
www.canon.ca/  
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.  
Please have the following information ready when you contact Canon:  
Product name (imageCLASS D1180/D1170/D1150/D1120)  
Serial number (on the label located on the rear cover)  
Place of purchase  
Nature of problem  
Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results  
If the machine makes strange noises, emits smoke or odd odor, turn OFF the main power switch immediately, disconnect the power  
cord, and contact Canon Customer Care Center. Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine yourself.  
Attempting to repair the machine yourself may void the limited warranty.  
12-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Machine Settings  
Machine Settings  
You can adjust the machine settings from the Setting Menu to customize the way the  
machine works. To see the list of the current settings, print out USER DATA LIST.  
– <VOLUME CONTROL>  
– <COMMON SETTINGS>  
Printing USER DATA LIST  
– <COPY SETTINGS>  
– <TX/RX SETTINGS>  
– <ADDRESS BOOK SET.>  
– <PRINTER SETTINGS>  
– <TIMER SETTINGS>  
– <ADJUST./CLEANING>  
– <REPORT SETTINGS>  
– <SYSTEM SETTINGS>  
To print USER DATA LIST, follow the procedure  
below.  
Press [Report] repeatedly to select  
1
2
<USER DATA LIST>, then press [OK].  
USER DATA LIST  
Press  
to select <YES>.  
These menus are based on the D1180.  
OK TO PRINT?  
< YES  
NO >  
Printing starts, and the screen automatically  
returns to the standby mode.  
Press  
then press [OK].  
or  
to select a submenu,  
3
Accessing the Setting Menu  
VOLUME CONTROL  
1.MONITOR VOLUME  
To access the setting menu, follow the procedure  
below.  
Press [Menu].  
1
For details on the submenu, see“Setting Menu,”  
on p. 13-3.  
Press  
or  
to select the menu you  
want to access, then press [OK].  
2
To register the settings or go to a  
submenu item, press [OK].  
MENU  
4
5
1.VOLUME CONTROL  
When finished, press [Stop/Reset] to  
return to the standby mode.  
– If you press  
[Stop/Reset] before pressing  
[OK], the setting will not be registered.  
– Press [Menu] to return to the previous  
display.  
13-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
Setting Menu  
The menus described in this section are based on the D1180. Depending on the model of  
your machine, some settings may not be available and the number on each menu may vary.  
The default settings are indicated in bold text.  
VOLUME CONTROL  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. MONITOR VOLUME *1  
– OFF  
e-Manual  
ON (1-3)  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
2. RING VOLUME *1  
3. ENTRY TONE  
1-3  
– OFF  
ON (1-3)  
4. ERROR TONE  
– OFF  
ON (1-3)  
5. TX JOB DONE TONE *1  
– OFF  
– ON (1-3)  
ERROR ONLY (1-3)  
6. RX JOB DONE TONE *1  
7. SCAN DONE TONE  
– OFF  
– ON (1-3)  
ERROR ONLY (1-3)  
– OFF  
– ON (1-3)  
ERROR ONLY (1-3)  
8. PRINT DONE TONE  
– OFF  
– ON (1-3)  
ERROR ONLY (1-3)  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
13-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Menu  
COMMON SETTINGS  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. INITIAL FUNCTION  
COPY  
– SEND*1  
– SCAN  
e-Manual  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
2. AUTO CLEAR SET.  
INITIAL FUNCTION  
– SELECTED FUNCTION  
3. TONER SAVER MODE  
OFF  
– ON  
4. PRINTER DENSITY  
5. AUTO CASS. SELCT  
1. COPY  
1-9 (5)  
1. CASSETTE 1  
– OFF  
ON  
2. CASSETTE 2*2  
3. MP TRAY  
– OFF  
ON  
OFF  
– ON  
2. PRINTER  
1. CASSETTE 1  
– OFF  
ON  
2. CASSETTE 2*2  
– OFF  
ON  
3. RECEIVE*1  
1. CASSETTE 1  
– OFF  
ON  
2. CASSETTE 2*2  
3. MP TRAY  
– OFF  
ON  
OFF  
– ON  
4. OTHER  
1. CASSETTE 1  
– OFF  
ON  
2. CASSETTE 2*2  
3. MP TRAY  
– OFF  
ON  
OFF  
– ON  
6. DISPLAY LANGUAGE  
ENGLISH  
– SPANISH  
– FRENCH  
– PORTUGUESE  
13-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
7. TOGGLE SPEED  
NORMAL  
– SLOW  
– FAST  
e-Manual  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
8. INIT. COMMON SET.  
– YES  
– NO  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150. On the D1150, <FAX> appears instead of <SEND>.  
*2 Available only for machines with the optional paper cassette.  
COPY SETTINGS  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. STANDARD SETTINGS  
1. IMAGE QUALITY  
TEXT/PHOTO  
– TEXT/PHOTO+  
– TEXT  
– PHOTO  
2. DENSITY  
MANUAL (1-9) (5)  
– AUTO  
3. ZOOM RATIO  
PRESET RATIO  
– 200% MAX.  
– 141% A5A4  
– 129% STMTLTR  
– 122% A5B5  
– 115% B5A4  
100%  
– 86% A4B5  
– 81% B5A5  
– 78% LGLLTR  
– 70% A4A5  
– 64%  
– 50% MIN.  
ZOOM 50-200%  
4. COPIES  
1 % increments. (50-200 % (100 %))  
1-99 (1)  
5. COLLATE  
OFF  
– ON  
6. 2-SIDED  
OFF  
– 1 > 2-SIDED  
– 2 > 2-SIDED  
– 2 > 1-SIDED  
7. PAPER SELECT  
2. SHARPNESS  
AUTO  
– CASSETTE 1  
– CASSETTE 2*1  
1-9 (5)  
13-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
3. PAPER SIZE GROUP  
INCHES  
– A  
– AB  
4. INIT. COPY SET.  
– YES  
– NO  
*1 Available only for machines with the optional paper cassette.  
TX/RX SETTINGS *1  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. DELAYED SEND  
OFF  
– ON (00:00-23:59)  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
2. TX/RX COMMON SET.  
1. TX SETTINGS  
1. UNIT NAME  
Maximum 24 characters  
Starter Guide  
“Register User  
Telephone Number  
and Unit Name”  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
2. DATA  
NORMAL  
COMPRESSION *2  
– HIGH RATIO  
– LOW RATIO  
0-5 TIMES (3 TIMES)  
1-9 (5)  
3. RETRY TIMES*2  
4. SCANNING DENSITY  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
5. STANDARD SETTINGS  
1. DENSITY  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
STANDARD  
– DK  
– LT  
2. RESOLUTION  
100×100dpi*1, 150×150dpi*1, 200×100dpi, 200×200dpi,  
200×400dpi, 300×300dpi*1, 400×400dpi, 600×600dpi*1  
3. IMAGE  
FORMAT *2  
PDF  
– TIFF(B&W)  
– PDF(COMPACT)  
– JPEG  
TEXT/PHOTO  
– TEXT  
4. ORIGINAL TYPE*2  
– PHOTO  
OFF  
5. DIVIDE INTO PAGES*2  
– ON  
13-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
6. SEND SETTINGS*2  
1. TX FILE NAME  
2. SUBJECT  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
Maximum 24 characters  
Maximum 40 characters (Attached Image)  
Maximum 140 characters  
3. MESSAGE TEXT  
4. REPLY-TO  
Maximum 120 characters  
5. E-MAIL PRIORITY  
NORMAL  
– LOW  
– HIGH  
7. TX TERMINAL ID  
1. PRINTING POSITION  
OUTSIDE IMAGE  
– INSIDE IMAGE  
2. TELEPHONE # MARK  
8. COLOR TX GAMMA*2  
FAX  
– TEL  
GAMMA 1.0, GAMMA 1.4, GAMMA 1.8, GAMMA 2.2  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
9. SHARPNESS  
1-7 (4)  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”, “Scanning  
Documents to a File  
Server”  
10. INIT STANDARD SET  
– YES  
– NO  
2. RX SETTINGS  
1. TWO-SIDED PRINT  
OFF  
– ON  
2. RECEIVE REDUCTION  
1. RX REDUCTION  
– OFF  
ON  
AUTO  
– FIXED REDUCTION (90%, 95%, 97%, 75%)  
2. REDUCE DIRECTION  
3. RX PAGE FOOTER  
4. CONT. PRINTING  
VERTICAL ONLY  
– HORIZ & VERTICAL  
OFF  
– ON  
RX TO MEMORY  
KEEP PRINTING  
3. FAX SETTINGS  
1. RX MODE  
-
FaxOnly  
– FaxTel  
– AnsMode  
– DRPD  
– Manual  
13-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
2. USER SETTINGS  
1. UNIT TELEPHONE #  
Maximum 20 digits  
Starter Guide  
“Register User  
Telephone Number  
and Unit Name”  
2. TEL LINE TYPE  
TOUCH TONE  
– ROTARY PULSE  
3. OFFHOOK ALARM  
3. TX SETTINGS  
1. ECM TX  
This setting is not available for the machine.  
– OFF  
ON  
2. PAUSE TIME  
1-15 SEC (2 SEC)  
3. AUTO REDIAL  
– OFF  
ON  
1. REDIAL TIMES  
1-10 TIMES (2 TIMES)  
2-99 MIN. (2 MIN.)  
2. REDIAL INTERVAL  
3. TX ERROR REDIAL  
– OFF  
ON  
4. TIME OUT  
OFF  
– ON  
5. DIALING LINE CHCK  
OFF  
– ON  
4. RX SETTINGS  
1. ECM RX  
ON  
– OFF  
2. FAX/TEL OPT. SET  
1. RING START TIME  
2. F/T RING TIME  
4-30 SEC (6 SEC)  
15-300 SEC (15 SEC)  
3. F/T SWITCH ACTION  
RECEIVE  
– DISCONNECT  
3. DRPD:SELECT FAX  
DOUBLE RING  
– SHORT-SHORT-LONG  
– SHORT-LONG-SHORT  
– OTHER RING TYPE  
– NORMAL RING  
4. INCOMING RING  
– OFF  
ON  
RING COUNT  
1-99 TIMES (2 TIMES)  
5. REMOTE RX  
– OFF  
ON  
REMOTE RX ID  
0-99 (25)  
13-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
6. MANUAL/AUTO  
OFF  
– ON  
F/T RING TIME  
1-99 SEC (15 SEC)  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
*2 Available for the D1180/D1170.  
ADDRESS BOOK SET. *1  
Item  
1. 1-TOUCH SPD DIAL  
FAX  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
Maximum 20 destinations  
1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
2. NAME  
Maximum 40 digits  
Maximum 16 characters  
3. OPTIONAL SETTING  
OFF  
– ON  
1. LONG DISTANCE  
DOMESTIC  
– LONG DISTANCE 1  
– LONG DISTANCE 2  
– LONG DISTANCE 3  
2. TX SPEED  
3. ECM  
33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps  
– OFF  
ON  
E-MAIL*2  
1. E-MAIL ADDRESS  
2. NAME  
SMB*2  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 16 characters  
1. HOST NAME  
2. NAME  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 16 characters  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 24 characters  
Maximum 14 characters  
3. FILE PATH  
4. LOGIN NAME  
5. PASSWORD  
13-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
2. CODED SPD DIAL  
FAX  
Maximum 180 destinations  
1. TEL NUMBER ENTRY  
Maximum 40 digits  
2. NAME  
Maximum 16 characters  
3. OPTIONAL SETTING  
OFF  
– ON  
1. LONG DISTANCE  
DOMESTIC  
– LONG DISTANCE 1  
– LONG DISTANCE 2  
– LONG DISTANCE 3  
2. TX SPEED  
3. ECM  
33600bps, 14400bps, 9600bps, 4800bps  
– OFF  
ON  
E-MAIL*2  
1. E-MAIL ADDRESS  
2. NAME  
SMB*2  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 16 characters  
1. HOST NAME  
2. NAME  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 16 characters  
Maximum 120 characters  
Maximum 24 characters  
Maximum 14 characters  
3. FILE PATH  
4. LOGIN NAME  
5. PASSWORD  
3. GROUP DIAL  
1. SELECT ADD/TEL NO (D1180/  
D1170)  
Maximum 199 destinations  
TEL NUMBER ENTRY (D1150)  
2. NAME  
Maximum 16 characters  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
*2 Available for the D1180/D1170.  
13-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
PRINTER SETTINGS  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. DEFAULT PAPERSIZE  
LTR, EXECUTIV, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, NO.10 (COM10), CAT.  
e-Manual  
GLOVE NO.8, DL, A4, B5, A5, LGL  
“Printer Settings  
from the Machine”  
2. DEFAULT PAPERTYPE  
PLAIN PAPER, PLAIN PAPER L, RECYCLED, COLOR, HEAVY  
PAPER 1, HEAVY PAPER 2, TRANSPARENCY , LABELS,  
ENVELOPE  
3. COPIES  
1-999 (1)  
4. 2-SIDED PRINTING  
OFF  
– ON  
5. PRINT QUALITY  
1. IMAGE REFINEMENT  
– OFF  
ON  
2. DENSITY  
1-9 (5)  
3. TONER SAVER  
OFF  
– ON  
6. PAGE LAYOUT  
1. BINDING  
LONG EDGE  
– SHORT EDGE  
2. MARGIN  
INCHES (-01.90 to 01.90 INCHES) (00.00)  
– mm (-50.0 to 50.0 mm) (0.0)  
7. COLLATE  
OFF  
– ON  
8. ERROR TIME OUT  
9. INIT. PRINTER SET  
– OFF  
ON (5–300 SEC) (15 SEC)  
– YES  
– NO  
10. PCL SETTINGS*1  
1. PAPER SAVE  
OFF  
– ON  
2. ORIENTATION  
PORTRAIT  
– LANDSCAPE  
3. FONT NUMBER  
4. POINT SIZE  
5. PITCH  
0-54 (0)  
(4.00–999.75) (12.00)  
(0.44–99.99) (10.00)  
(5-128) (60)  
6. FORM LINES  
7. SYMBOL SET  
PC8, PC850, PC852, PC858, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004,  
PSTEXT, ROMAN8, ROMAN9, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1,  
WINL2, WINL5, DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17,  
ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, ISOL9,  
LEGAL, MCTEXT, PC775  
13-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
8. CUSTOM PAPER  
1. UNIT OF MEASURE  
2. X DIMENSION  
OFF  
– ON  
e-Manual  
“Printer Settings  
from the Machine”  
INCHES  
– MILLIMETERS  
Specifies the horizontal size of the custom paper.  
(03.00–08.50" (76–216 mm)) (08.50”)  
3. Y DIMENSION  
Specifies the vertical size of the custom paper.  
(05.00–14.00" (127–356 mm)) (14.00”)  
9. APPEND CR TO LF  
10. ENLARGE A4*2  
NO  
– YES  
OFF  
– ON  
11. HALFTONES  
1. TEXT  
– TONE  
– GRADATION  
RESOLUTION  
2. GRAPHICS  
3. IMAGE  
TONE  
– GRADATION  
– RESOLUTION  
TONE  
– GRADATION  
– RESOLUTION  
12. RESET PRINTER  
– YES  
– NO  
*1 Available for the D1180.  
*2 Applicable for A4 paper and portrait orientation for the PCL5 printing only. The PCL6 printing is not supported.  
13-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
TIMER SETTINGS  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
1. DATE&TIME SETTING  
– MONTH (01-12)  
e-Manual  
– DAY (01-28, 29, 30, 31)  
– YEAR (00-99)  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
– HOUR (00-23)  
– MINUTE (00-59)  
2. TIME ZONE SETTING*1  
3. DATE TYPE SELECT  
GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00 (GMT-5:00)  
MM/DD/YYYY  
– DD/MM YYYY  
– YYYY MM/DD  
4. AUTO SLEEP TIME  
5. AUTO CLEAR TIME  
6. DAYLIGHT SV.TIME  
1. START DATE/TIME  
– OFF  
ON (3-30 MIN.) (5 MIN.)  
– OFF  
ON (1-9 MIN.) (2 MIN.)  
OFF  
– ON  
– 1 MONTH (JANUARY, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL,  
MAY, JUNE, JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER,  
NOVEMBER, DECEMBER)  
– 2 WEEK (FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK,  
FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEK)  
– 3 DAY (SUNDAY, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY,  
THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY)  
2. END DATE/TIME  
– 1 MONTH (JANUARY, FEBRUARY, MARCH, APRIL,  
MAY, JUNE, JULY, AUGUST, SEPTEMBER, OCTOBER,  
NOVEMBER, DECEMBER)  
– 2 WEEK (FIRST WEEK, SECOND WEEK, THIRD WEEK,  
FOURTH WEEK, LAST WEEK)  
– 3 DAY (SUNDAY, MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY,  
THURSDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY)  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
13-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
ADJUST./CLEANING  
Item  
1. FIX.UNIT CLEANING  
1. CLEAN PAPER PRT  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
– YES  
– NO  
2. START CLEANING  
– YES  
– NO  
2. FEEDER CLEANING  
3. SPECIAL MODE U  
Set 10 sheets in the ADF and press [OK].  
OFF  
e-Manual  
– ON  
“Maintenance”  
4. SPECIAL MODE V  
5. SPECIAL MODE X*1  
OFF  
– ON  
– OFF  
MODE1  
– MODE2  
– MODE3  
6. SPECIAL MODE Z  
7. SPECIAL MODE B  
– OFF  
MODE1  
– MODE2  
– MODE3  
OFF  
– MODE1  
– MODE2  
– MODE3  
8. SPECIAL MODE C  
9. SPECIAL MODE D  
*1 Available for the D1180.  
OFF  
– ON  
OFF  
– ON  
13-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
REPORT SETTINGS *1  
Item  
1. SETTINGS  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
e-Manual  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
1. TX REPORT  
– OUTPUT NO  
PRINT ERROR ONLY  
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE (OFF, ON)  
– OUTPUT YES  
REPORT WITH TX IMAGE (OFF, ON)  
2. RX REPORT  
OUTPUT NO  
– PRINT ERROR ONLY  
– OUTPUT YES  
3. ACTIVITY REPORT  
1. AUTO PRINT  
– OUTPUT NO  
OUTPUT YES  
2. TX/RX SEPARATE  
OFF  
– ON  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
13-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Menu  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Item  
1. SYS. MANAGER INFO  
1. SYS. MANAGER ID  
2. SYSTEM PASSWORD  
3. SYSTEM MANAGER  
2. DEVICE INFO  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
e-Manual  
“Security”  
Seven digits  
Seven digits  
Maximum 32 characters  
1. DEVICE NAME  
Maximum 32 characters  
Maximum 32 characters  
2. LOCATION  
3. MANAGE DEPT. ID  
OFF  
ON  
1. REGISTER DEPT. ID  
1. PASSWORD  
100 Department IDs  
Seven digits  
2. PAGE LIMIT SET.  
1. TOTAL PRINT LIMIT  
OFF  
– ON (000000-999999)  
2. COPY LIMIT  
3. BLACK SCAN LIMIT *1  
4. COLOR SCAN LIMIT*2  
5. PRINT LIMIT  
OFF  
– ON (000000-999999)  
OFF  
– ON (000000-999999)  
OFF  
– ON (000000-999999)  
OFF  
– ON (000000-999999)  
3. ERASE  
– YES  
– NO  
2. PAGE TOTALS  
1. VIEW PAGE TOTALS  
– 1. TOTAL PRINT  
– 2. COPY  
– 3. SCAN*1  
– 4. COLOR SCAN*2  
– 5. PRINT  
2. CLEAR ALL TOTAL  
3. PRINT LIST  
– YES  
– NO  
– YES  
– NO  
3. PDL JOBS W/OUT ID  
4. MANAGE USER ID  
– OFF  
ON  
OFF  
– ON  
13-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Menu  
Item  
5. NETWORK SETTINGS  
1. TCP/IP SETTINGS  
1. IP ADDRESS AUTO.  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
e-Manual  
“Network Settings”  
– OFF  
ON  
1. DHCP  
2. BOOTP  
3. RARP  
– OFF  
ON  
OFF  
– ON  
OFF  
– ON  
2. REG. IP ADDRESS  
1. IP ADDRESS  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
2. SUBNET MASK  
3. GATEWAY ADDRESS  
3. VIEW IP ADDRESS  
1. IP ADDRESS  
Current address  
Current address  
Current address  
2. SUBNET MASK  
3. GATEWAY ADDRESS  
4. DNS SETTINGS  
1. PRIM. DNS SERVER  
2. SECOND DNS SERVER  
3. HOST NAME  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
Maximum 47 characters  
4. DOMAIN NAME  
5. DNS DYNA. UPDATE  
Maximum 47 characters  
OFF  
– ON  
5. CONFIGURE WINS*2  
1. WINS RESOLUTION  
OFF  
– ON  
2. WINS SERVER  
6. LPD PRINT  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
– OFF  
ON  
7. RAW PRINT  
USE BIDIRECTIONAL  
8. USE HTTP  
– OFF  
ON  
– OFF  
ON  
– OFF  
ON  
13-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
9. PORT NO.  
1. LPD  
e-Manual  
“Network Settings”  
0–65535 (515)  
0–65535 (9100)  
0–65535 (80)  
0–65535 (25)  
0–65535 (110)  
0–65535 (25)  
0–65535 (161)  
2. RAW  
3. HTTP  
4. SMTP RX*2  
5. POP3 RX*2  
6. SMTP TX*2  
7. SNMP  
10. SET IP ADD RANGE  
OFF  
– ON  
1. PERMIT/REJECT  
– PERMIT  
REJECT  
2. SET IP ADDRESS  
1. IP ADDRESS 1  
1. START IP  
ADDRESS  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
2. END IP  
ADDRESS  
2. IP ADDRESS 2  
1. START IP  
ADDRESS  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
2. END IP  
ADDRESS  
3. IP ADDRESS 3  
1. START IP  
ADDRESS  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
2. END IP  
ADDRESS  
4. IP ADDRESS 4  
1. START IP  
ADDRESS  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
IP address (000.000.000.000)  
2. END IP  
ADDRESS  
11. PERMIT RX MAC ADD  
OFF  
– ON  
1. PERMIT RX ADD1  
2. PERMIT RX ADD2  
3. PERMIT RX ADD3  
4. PERMIT RX ADD4  
5. PERMIT RX ADD5  
MAC address (00-00-00-00-00-00)  
MAC address (00-00-00-00-00-00)  
MAC address (00-00-00-00-00-00)  
MAC address (00-00-00-00-00-00)  
MAC address (00-00-00-00-00-00)  
13-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
2. USE SMB CLIENT*2  
– OFF  
e-Manual  
ON  
“Network Settings”  
1. SERVER  
Maximum 15 characters  
Maximum 15 characters  
Maximum 48 characters  
2. WORKGROUP  
3. COMMENT  
4. LM ANNOUNCE  
OFF  
– ON  
3. SNMP SETTINGS  
1. USE SNMP  
– OFF  
ON  
2. COMMUNITY NAME 1  
3. COMMUNITY NAME 2  
4. SNMP WRITABLE 1  
Maximum 15 characters (public)  
Maximum 15 characters  
– OFF  
ON  
5. SNMP WRITABLE 2  
4. DEDICATED PORT  
OFF  
– ON  
– OFF  
ON  
5. ETHERNET DRIVER  
1. AUTO DETECT  
AUTO  
– MANUAL  
1. COMMUNICATN MODE – HALF DUPLEX  
– FULL DUPLEX  
2. ETHERNET TYPE  
10 BASE-T  
– 100 BASE-TX  
6. E-MAIL/I-FAX*2  
1. SMTP RX  
OFF  
– ON  
2. SMTP SERVER  
3. POP  
Maximum 48 characters  
OFF  
– ON  
4. AUTH/ENC SETTINGS  
1. POP BEFORE SEND  
OFF  
– ON  
2. SMTP AUTH  
OFF  
– ON  
1. USER  
2. PASSWORD  
Maximum 64 characters  
Maximum 32 characters  
Maximum 64 characters  
Maximum 48 characters  
Maximum 32 characters  
5. E-MAIL ADDRESS  
6. POP SERVER  
7. POP ADDRESS  
13-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
8. POP PASSWORD  
9. POP INTERVAL  
Maximum 32 characters  
0-99 MIN. (0 MIN.)  
0-300 SEC (0 SEC)  
e-Manual  
“Network Settings”  
7. STARTUP TIME SET.  
6. COMMUNICATIONS*1  
1. COUNTRY/REGION  
UNITED STATES  
– CANADA  
– BRAZIL  
e-Manual  
“Introduction of the  
Machine”  
– MEXICO  
– OTHERS  
2. E-MAIL SETTINGS*2  
1. MAX TX DATA SIZE  
2. DIVIDED OVER MAX  
e-Manual  
“E-Mail”  
0-99 MB (0 MB)  
OFF  
– ON  
3. FAX SETTINGS  
1. TX START SPEED  
33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps,  
14400bps  
2. RX START SPEED  
4. MEMORY LOCK  
33600bps, 2400bps, 4800bps, 7200bps, 9600bps,  
14400bps  
OFF  
– ON  
1. PASSWORD  
Seven digits  
2. REPORT PRINT  
OFF  
– ON  
3. MEMORY RX TIME  
1. MEM RX START TIME  
2. MEM. RX END TIME  
OFF  
– ON  
HOUR (00-23)  
MINUTE (00-59)  
HOUR (00-23)  
MINUTE (00-59)  
7. FORWARD ERR. SET.*1  
1. PRINT  
e-Manual  
“Fax”  
– OFF  
ON  
2. STORE TO MEMORY  
8. REMOTE UI  
OFF  
– ON  
– OFF  
ON  
13-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Menu  
Item  
9. ACCESS TO DEST.*1  
1. ADD. BOOK PASSWORD  
Settings  
Applicable Page  
e-Manual  
“Security”  
OFF  
– ON (Seven digits)  
2. RESTRICT NEW ADD.  
3. FAX DRIVER TX  
OFF  
– ON  
– OFF  
ON  
4. CONFIRM FAX NO.  
5. REST. REDIAL/CALL  
6. REST. MULTI DEST  
OFF  
– ON  
OFF  
– ON  
OFF  
– CONFIRMATION  
– PROHIBIT  
10. CHECKING THE LOG*1  
11. USE DEVICE USB  
– OFF  
ON  
– OFF  
ON  
12. UPDATE FIRMWARE  
This function is only used when the firmware needs to be  
updated.  
*1 Available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
*2 Available for the D1180/D1170.  
13-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
General  
Type  
Personal Desktop  
Power Source  
120–127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements differ depending on the country in which  
you purchased the product.)  
Power Consumption  
Warm up Time  
Maximum: Less than 1090 W  
16 seconds or less*  
(temperature: 68°F (20°C), humidity: 65%; from when the machine turns ON the  
main power switch until the standby display appears)  
* Warm-up time may differ depending on the condition and environment of the  
machine.  
Weight  
Approx. 45.4 lb (20.6 kg) (including the toner cartridge)  
Dimensions  
18 1/4" (H) × 18 5/8" (D) × 17 3/4" (W) (464 mm (H) × 472 mm (D) × 450 mm (W))  
24 7/8" × 18 5/8" (D) × 17 3/4" (W) (630.3 mm (H) × 472 mm (D) × 450 mm (W))  
(with the optional paper cassette attached)  
Installation Space  
32 1/2" (H) × 52 3/4" (D) × 25 5/8" (W) (824 mm (H) × 1340.2 mm (D) × 650 mm (W))  
39" (H) × 52 3/4" (D) × 25 5/8" (W) (990.3 mm (H) × 1340.2 mm (D) × 650 mm (W))  
(with the optional paper cassette attached)  
Environmental Conditions  
Temperature: 50°F–86°F (10°C–30°C)  
Humidity: 20–80% RH (no condensation)  
Display Languages  
Acceptable Documents  
Acceptable Paper Stock  
Printable Area  
ENGLISH/FRENCH/SPANISH/PORTUGUESE  
» p. 2-2  
» p. 2-6  
» p. 2-8  
» p. 2-3  
Scanning Area  
14-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Specifications  
Copier  
Scanning Resolution  
TEXT/PHOTO mode: 300 dpi × 600 dpi  
TEXT mode, PHOTO mode, TEXT/PHOTO+ mode: 600 dpi × 600 dpi  
Printing Resolution  
Magnification  
600 dpi × 600 dpi  
1:1 1.0%, 1:2.00, 1:1.29, 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50  
Zoom 0.50–2.00, 1% increments  
Copy Speed  
Direct: 30 cpm (LTR)  
(The copy speed may drop depending on the number of copies and on the paper  
settings for the size, type, and orientation.)  
No. of Copies  
Maximum 99 copies  
First Copy Time  
Platen glass: 8 seconds or less (LTR)  
ADF: 12 seconds or less (LTR)  
Printer  
Printing Method  
Mono Laser Beam Printer  
Paper Handling  
Paper cassette: 500 sheets (Height: maximum 2 1/4" (56 mm))  
Multi-purpose tray: 50 sheets  
Paper Delivery  
Print Speed  
65 sheets (17 to 21 lb (64 to 80 g/m2))  
Direct: 30 ppm (LTR)  
(The print speed may drop depending on the number of prints and on the paper  
settings for the size, type, and orientation.)  
Printing Resolution  
Number of Tones  
Toner Cartridge  
1200 × 600 dpi (enhanced)  
256  
» p. 1-14  
Scanner  
Type  
Color scanner  
Maximum Scanning Size  
Scanning Resolution  
Scanning Speed  
8 1/2" × 14" (216 mm × 356 mm)  
600 × 600 dpi (optical)  
Color: 2.2 msec/line (600 dpi)  
Grayscale: 2.2 msec/line (600 dpi)  
Host Interface  
USB 1.1, USB 2.0  
System Requirements  
Device Driver  
Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7  
TWAIN: Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7  
WIA 1.0: Windows XP/Vista/7  
WIA 2.0: Windows Vista/7  
14-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Facsimile  
Applicable Line  
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)*1  
Compatibility  
G3  
Data Compression Schemes  
Modem Speed  
MH, MR, MMR, JBIG  
33.6 Kbps  
Automatic fallback  
Transmission Speed  
Approx. 3 seconds/page*2 at 33.6 Kbps, ECM-MMR, transmitting from the memory  
Transmission/Reception Memory Maximum approx. 512 pages*2  
(total pages of transmission/reception)  
Fax Resolution  
FINE: 203 pels/inch × 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)  
PHOTO: 203 pels/inch × 196 lines/inch (8 pels/mm × 7.7 lines/mm)  
SUPER FINE: 203 pels/inch × 392 lines/inch (8 pels/mm × 15.4lines/mm)  
ULTRA FINE: 406 pels/inch × 392 lines/inch (16 pels/mm × 15.4lines/mm)  
STANDARD: 203 pels/inch × 98 lines/inch (8 pels/mm × 3.85 lines/mm)  
Dialing  
– Speed dialing  
One-touch speed dialing (20 destinations)  
Coded speed dialing (180 destinations)  
Group dialing (199 destinations in a group maximum)  
Address Book dialing (with Address Book key)  
– Regular dialing (with numeric keys)  
– Automatic redialing  
– Manual redialing (with Recall/Pause or Redial/Pause key)  
– Sequential broadcast (201 destinations)  
– Automatic reception  
– Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)  
– ACTIVITY REPORT (after every 40 transactions)  
– TX (Transmission)/RX (Reception) REPORT  
– TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification)  
*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports 28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower, depending on  
telephone line conditions.  
*2 Based on ITU-T Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.  
The Fax function is available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
Telephone  
Connection  
External telephone/answering machine/data modem  
The telephone is available for the D1180/D1170/D1150.  
14-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Send  
Send to file server  
Communication Protocol  
Data Format  
SMB (TCP/IP)  
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)  
Resolution  
100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 ×  
400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi  
System Environment  
Windows XP Professional/Home Edition, Windows 2000 Server/Professional (SP1  
or later), Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista/7, Windows Server 2008, Mac OS X,  
Red Hat Linux 7.2  
Interface  
100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T  
Color Mode  
Original Type  
E-Mail  
Color, B&W (black and white)  
Text, Text/Photo, Photo  
Communication Protocol  
Resolution  
SMTP, POP3  
100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 ×  
400 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi  
Format  
TIFF (B&W), PDF (B&W), JPEG (Color), PDF (Compact) (Color)  
LTR, LGL, STMTR, STMT, A4, A5, B5  
Original Size  
Server Software  
Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 (SP2), Sendmail 8.11.2, Lotus Domino R4.5/R5  
The Send function is available for the D1180/D1170.  
Cassette Feeding Module-U1 (Optional)  
Paper Feeding System  
Acceptable Paper Stock  
Power Source  
500 sheets × 1 cassette (21 lb (80 g/m2))  
» p. 2-6  
From the main unit  
Dimensions  
6 5/8" (H) × 18 5/8" (D) × 17 3/4" (W) (166.3 mm (H) × 472 mm (D) × 450 mm (W))  
Approx. 11.5 lb (5.2 kg)  
Weight  
14-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Index  
Symbols  
B
Basic Method  
A
C
Address Book  
Canceling  
Canceling Copy Jobs  
Adjusting  
Changing  
Checking  
14-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
Cleaning  
E
E-Mail addresses  
ECM  
Coded Dial Codes  
D
Density  
F
Fax numbers  
File server addresses  
14-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
G
Group addresses  
H
I
M
Initialize  
Introduction  
N
J
O
One-touch  
K
L
14-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Printing  
Overview  
R
Receive mode  
P
Paper Jams  
Registering  
Requirements  
S
14-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Setting Menu  
Selecting  
Sending  
Setting  
14-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CANON INC.  
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan  
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.  
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan  
CANON U.S.A., INC.  
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.  
CANON EUROPA N.V.  
Bovenkerkerweg, 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands  
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.  
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC  
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD  
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632  
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD  
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia  
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES  
http://www.canon.com/  
FT5-3029 (010)  
xxxxxxxxxx  
© CANON INC. 2010  
PRINTED IN CHINA  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Decker Lawn Mower CM1936Z User Manual
Bogen Stereo Amplifier C10C User Manual
Bravetti Cooktop MC665H User Manual
Canon Photo Printer PRO9000 User Manual
Casablanca Fan Company Fan 54028 User Manual
Casio Calculator FX 82SX User Manual
Casio Digital Camera ex zs6 User Manual
Cecilware Food Warmer FFW575 User Manual
Chicago Electric Power Hammer 97743 User Manual
Chromalox Air Conditioner UB 3502A User Manual